Contents

Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 235
1 of 235

Summary of Content for Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

Owners Manual IMPORTANT

Check Your Power Supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a minus screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

92-469- (bottom)

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap- proximately five years. When replacement becomes nec- essary, contact a qualified service representative to per- form the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturers warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con- sult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph- ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi- cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in- struction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the equi- lateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important oper- ating and maintenance (servicing) in- structions in the literature accompany- ing the product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the pres- ence of uninsulated dangerous volt- age within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to con- stitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod- ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and custom- ary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product per- formance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

Model _____________________________________

Serial No. __________________________________

Purchase Date ______________________________

CVP-109/CVP-107

CVP-105

CVP-700

3CVP-109/107/105/700

On the CVP-109/700, bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution.

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap.

Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly pro- cess. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might re- sult in damage to the instrument or even injury.

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom- fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

USING THE BENCH (if included) Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

SAVING USER DATA Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the loss

of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con- nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over- heating in the outlet.

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter- nal components.

Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden- tally fall over.

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

On the CVP-109/700, gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instruments fin- ish.

(1)B_EL/CL-4vari.

1

4 CVP-109/107/105/700

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual care- fully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Accessories Music Software Collection Disk (and Music Book) This disk features sample songs that you can play back on your Clavinova, as well as MIDI driver software for computers.

Floppy Disk Use this blank disk to record your performances.

Owners Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.

Reference Booklet This manual contains lists of voices, styles, and parameters, etc., as well as specifications and assembly instructions for your Clavinova.

Bench A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owners

manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other

than the purchasers personal use is prohibited.

This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents

No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from

IVL Technologies Ltd.

Trademarks: Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Com-

puter, Inc.

IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business

Machines Corporation.

Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respec-

tive holders.

The Panel Logos The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.

Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700) Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal process- ing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects.

Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback com- patibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices.

Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamahas original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high- quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Custom Style feature.

GM System Level 1 GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly ex- pands and improves on the GM System Level 1 standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the Clavinovas XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song files.

XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most com- mon format used for MIDI sequence files. The Clavinova is com- patible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records song data using SMF Format 0.)

2

5CVP-109/107/105/700

Features of the Clavinova Large, Easy-to-use LCD Display

The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-un- derstand control of the Clavinovas operations (page 16).

Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices The Clavinova has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices, including 224 original voices

(195 voices on the CVP-105), 6 Organ Flute voices (CVP-109/107/700), 480 XG voices, and 13 drum/ SFX kits (12 kits on the CVP-105). These include exceptionally natural-sounding piano, strings and brass voices, and the particularly expressive sweet wind voices (the CVP-105 has one sweet voice, SweetTrumpet). Moreover, you can play realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the key- board (page 36).

Playback of Song Disks The Clavinova can play back various commercially available song disks. With the appropriate disk

software, you can play the piano part of the song yourself along with a full orchestra or backing band (page 113). If the software contains lyrics, you can display them on the Clavinovas LCD on the CVP-107, CVP-109 and CVP-700, you can even output them to a television screen via the VIDEO OUT jack (page 215).

Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps help you learn songs by

showing you when and where to play the proper notes. The three-step system helps you to master each song quickly and easily (page 125).

Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment The Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova gives you full, exciting instrumental backing in your

favorite music styles, according to the chords you play (page 69). Theres even a wide selection of Pianist styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompaniment (page 70). Choose from no less than 170 accompaniment styles (the exact number of styles depends on the model), or create your own custom styles (page 91).

Easy Access to a Variety of Musical Enjoyment The Clavinova offers several ways to change panel settings without a lot of fuss. You can use the

One Touch Setting feature to select from four sets of voice, effect, and other settings appropriate to each accompaniment style (page 90). Or access the Music Database to choose from more than 400 sets of style and voice settings, selectable by title or style (page 79). You can even save your current setup for instant recall later using the handy Registration function (page 108).

Easy-to-use Recording Features You can record songs using a variety of methods, depending on your keyboard expertise and prefer-

ence. Choose from the Quick Recording, Track Recording, Chord Sequence Recording, and Step Edit functions (page 130).

Automatic Vocal Harmony Function (CVP-109/107/700) The Clavinovas unique Vocal Harmony feature employs advanced voice-processing technology to

automatically produce vocal harmony based on a lead vocal, allowing a single singer to sound like a vocal group (page 175).

Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection to Computers The Clavinova can be used as a high-quality sound source to play back music software for comput-

ers. It can also be used as a master keyboard, to enter performance data and create music with a com- puter (page 216).

3

6 CVP-109/107/105/700

Table of Contents

4

CHAPTER 1:

Getting Ready About This Manual 8

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks 9

Setting Up the Clavinova 10

Music Stand ..................................................................................... 10

Key Cover ........................................................................................ 10

Lid (CVP-700 only) ........................................................................... 11

Turning the Power On and Off ......................................................... 11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Playing the Demo Songs 14

CHAPTER 2:

Basic Operation Using the LCD Display Controls 16

Selecting a Function ........................................................................ 16

Changing a Setting .......................................................................... 17

Changing a Setting in a Menu Display ............................................. 18

Resetting a Functions Value ........................................................... 19

Displaying a Different Page ............................................................. 20

Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles .................................. 21

Exiting to the Main Display ............................................................... 21

Using the Direct Access Function .................................................... 22

Adjusting the Volume 23

Adjusting the Overall Volume ........................................................... 23

Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume ............................... 23

Setting the Keyboard Volume .......................................................... 23

Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels ............................... 24

Using an Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700) .............................. 24

Adjusting the Timbre (CVP-109/107/700) 25

Changing the Master Equalizer Settings .......................................... 25

Using the Equalizer Lock Function .................................................. 26

Using the Metronome 27

Using the Metronome ....................................................................... 27

Changing the Metronome Settings .................................................. 28

Using the Help Mode 29

CHAPTER 3:

Voices Selecting Voices 31

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display ....................... 31

Selecting Voices from the Main Display ........................................... 32

Organ Flutes (CVP-109/107/700) .................................................... 33

Keyboard Percussion ....................................................................... 36

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice ....................... 36

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Dual Mode 38

Selecting the Second Voice ............................................................. 38

Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode ........................................... 38

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice ................... 39

Exiting the Dual Mode ...................................................................... 40

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard Split Mode 41

Selecting the Left Voice ................................................................... 41

Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode ........................................... 42

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice ......................... 42

Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously ........................ 44

Exiting the Split Mode ...................................................................... 44

Using the Pedals 45

Damper Pedal (Right) ...................................................................... 45

Sostenuto Pedal (Center) ................................................................ 45

Soft Pedal (Left) ............................................................................... 45

CHAPTER 4:

Reverb and Other Effects Reverb 46

Turning the Reverb On or Off .......................................................... 46

Changing the Reverb Settings ......................................................... 47

Chorus 51

Turning the Chorus On or Off .......................................................... 51

Changing the Chorus Settings ......................................................... 52

Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700) 54

Turning the Effects On or Off ........................................................... 54

Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 55

Voice Effects (CVP-105) 58

Turning the Effects On ..................................................................... 58

Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 58

CHAPTER 5:

Accompaniment Styles (Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

Selecting Accompaniment Styles 61

Selecting a Style .............................................................................. 61

Playing the Accompaniment Styles 63

Varying the Style .............................................................................. 63

Starting the Accompaniment Style ................................................... 64

Stopping the Accompaniment Style ................................................. 67

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment 69

Using the Auto Accompaniment ....................................................... 69

Starting the Auto Accompaniment ................................................... 70

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment .................................................. 70

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................................. 71

Adjusting Individual Part Levels ....................................................... 77

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions 79

Music Database ............................................................................... 79

Accompaniment Assistance ............................................................. 81

Harmony .......................................................................................... 87

One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 90

Creating Your Own Styles 91

Recording a Custom Style ............................................................... 91

Other Custom Style Functions ......................................................... 99

Playing Back Your Custom Styles ................................................. 103

Messages in Custom Style Mode .................................................. 103

7CVP-109/107/105/700

5

Using Style Files 105

About the Yamaha Style File Format ............................................. 105

Loading Styles from a Disk ............................................................ 105

Playing Loaded Style Files ............................................................. 107

CHAPTER 6:

Registrations Using Registrations (Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) 108

Storing a Panel Setup .................................................................... 108

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings ........................................ 109

Protecting Panel Settings ............................................................... 110

Naming the Registration ................................................................ 111

CHAPTER 7:

Song Control Song Playback 113

Song Playback ............................................................................... 113

Part Cancel .................................................................................... 117

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment .... 118

Overall Song Playback Volume Control ......................................... 119

Adjustment of Track Settings ......................................................... 120

Changing Settings in the MIXER Display ....................................... 121

Repeat Functions ........................................................................... 122

Other Playback Controls ................................................................ 124

Playing Other Types of Music Data ............................................... 124

Guide Control 125

Guide Methods and Piano Roll ...................................................... 125

Using the Guide Function .............................................................. 126

Other Guide-related Functions ....................................................... 128

Song Recording 130

Recording Setup: Disk Format ....................................................... 131

Quick Recording ............................................................................ 132

Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) ....................................... 135

Adding New Tracks ........................................................................ 138

Punch-in/out Recording ................................................................. 138

Chord Sequence 141

Other Chord Sequence Functions ................................................. 144

Step Edit 146

Editing Song Events ....................................................................... 146

Common Parameters ..................................................................... 150

Event-specific Parameters ............................................................. 151

Editing the Event Lists ................................................................... 158

Filtering the Event List ................................................................... 161

Recording Music in Step Edit Mode ............................................... 162

Saving Your Changes .................................................................... 165

Other Record Edit Functions 166

Song Name .................................................................................... 166

Track Edit ....................................................................................... 167

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) ............................................. 170

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display ................................ 171

Setup Memory ................................................................................ 172

Vocal Harmony Memory (CVP 109/107/700) ................................. 173

Recording Without a Disk 174

About the CVP MEMORY Song ..................................................... 174

CHAPTER 8:

Vocal Harmony Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700) 175

Using Vocal Harmony .................................................................... 175

Changing the Vocal Harmony Settings .......................................... 176

Using Vocal Harmony Data ............................................................ 184

CHAPTER 9:

The Utility Functions Keyboard 188

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display page 1 ............................. 188

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display page 2 ............................. 189

Pedal 190

FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display page 3 ........................................ 190

Disk 192

FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display page 4 ......................................... 192

FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display page 5 ......................................... 196

FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display page 6 ......................................... 198

FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display page 7 ......................................... 199

FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display page 8 ......................................... 200

MIDI 201

FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display page 9 ......................................... 201

FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display page 10 ....................................... 202

FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display page 11 ....................................... 203

FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display page 12 ....................................... 204

Backup 206

FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display page 13 ................................ 206

FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display page 14 ................................ 207

Utility 208

FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display page 15 ....................... 208

FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display page 16 ....................... 209

FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] Display page 17 (CVP-109/107/700) .. 212

CHAPTER 10:

Connections Audio and Video Connections 213

Headphones ................................................................................... 213

Microphone (CVP-109/107/700) .................................................... 213

Audio Input and Output .................................................................. 214

Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700) ........................................... 215

Video Monitor (CVP-109/107/700) ................................................. 215

Data Connections 216

Connecting MIDI Equipment .......................................................... 216

Connecting to a Host Computer ..................................................... 216

APPENDICES Effect Type Lists ............................................................................ 218

Messages ....................................................................................... 221

Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 227

MIDI and Data Compatibility .......................................................... 229

Index .............................................................................................. 230

8 CVP-109/107/105/700

This section explains the notation conventions that are used throughout this manual.

Square brackets [ ] ............................................................................................

Square brackets enclose the names of panel buttons, sliders, and connectors as they appear on your Clavinova. For example, the DEMO button is expressed as [DEMO] in this manual.

Bold characters ....................................................................................................

Bold type represents items shown in the LCD display, as well as the cor- responding LCD buttons (i.e., the buttons directly below, or to the left or right of, these items). For example, the phrase Select RIGHT1 VOICE means that you should press the button directly below the RIGHT1 VOICE label at the bottom of the display.

Arrows in Operation Explanations ..................................................

Different types of arrows are used to distinguish the steps of an operation from its results.

Operation steps indicates that you should do , then do .

Operation results indicates that doing results in .

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

PAGE EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready About This Manual

6

CVP-107/700

9CVP-109/107/105/700

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head ......................................................................................

Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will even- tually cause read and write errors.

To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially- available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

Never open or close the key cover while a disk is extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position). The key cover may contact the disk, possibily dam- aging the disk or even the disk drive.

Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks.

About the Floppy Disks ...................................

To handle floppy disks with care: Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or

apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.

Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.

Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the ex- posed surface of the floppy disk inside.

Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.

Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are at- tached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disks write-protect tab to the protect position (tab open).

Data backup For maximum data security Yamaha

recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk Copy function on page 196.

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks .............

To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

Precautions Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.

DISK IN USE

To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the

FDD is stopped (check if the [DISK IN USE] lamp is off). Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

DISK IN USE

DISK IN USE lamp

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject prop- erly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try press- ing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.

Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

7

10 CVP-109/107/105/700

To raise the music stand:...........................................................................

Z Pull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

X Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear of the music stand.

C Lower the music stand so that it rests on the metal supports.

On the CVP-109/107/105, the illustration shows that the angle of the music stand can be set in one of three positions, according to the position of the metal supports. Set the left and right metal supports to the same position.

To lower the music stand: ........................................................................

Z Pull the music stand toward yourself as far as it will go.

X Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear sur- face of the stand.

C Gently lower the music stand backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music stand in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the stand, let the stand all the way down before releasing it.

To open the key cover: ..................................................................................

Z Lift the cover slightly (not too much).

X Slide the cover open.

To close the key cover: .................................................................................

Z Slide the cover toward you.

X Gently lower the cover over the keys.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the cover and main unit.

Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the instrument when the cover is opened, and may be impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.

Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover.

Music Stand

Key Cover

Setting Up the Clavinova

CVP-109

CVP-109

CVP-109

CVP-109

8

11CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Connect the power cord. Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the bottom panel of the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet. In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin con- figuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

X Press the [POWER] switch. The main display appears in the LCD display. (Initially, the voice Grand Piano and the accompaniment style 8 Beat 1 are selected.) The power lamp below the lower left end of the keyboard also lights.

C Adjust the LCD. If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CON- TRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.

V Adjust the volume. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume to an ap- propriate level.

When youre ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. Both the LCD display and the power lamp below the left end of the keyboard will turn off.

Turning the Power On and Off

POWER

CONTRAST

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Setting Up the Clavinova

9

To open the lid: .....................................................................................................

ZRaise the music stand as described in Music Stand on page 10.

XRaise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument).

CRaise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay fits into the recess in the lid.

To close the lid: .....................................................................................................

ZHold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.

XHold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.

CCarefully lower the lid, then lower the music stand as described in Music Stand on page 10.

CAUTION

Make sure that the end of the stay fits securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not prop- erly seated in the recess the lid may fall causing damage or injury.

Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall.

Be careful not to catch your fingers when raising or lowering the lid.

Lid (CVP-700 only)

-1 -2

12 CVP-109/107/105/700

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1

CVP-109

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN

FADE IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

21 3

5

6 *

& e r

t

y

8 7

4

9 0

! @ # $ % ^

(

)

q

w

u

i

p

Panel Controls and Terminals

Volume Section

1 [MASTER VOLUME] ....................................page 23 2 [ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................page 23

Special Mode Control Section

3 [DEMO] .........................................................page 14 4 [HELP] ..........................................................page 28

5 [VOCAL HARMONY] (CVP-109/107/700) .. page 175

Accompaniment Style Section

6 STYLE buttons .............................................page 61 7 [DISK/CUSTOM]...........................................page 91 8 [MUSIC DATABASE] ....................................page 79 9 [ACMP ASSIST]............................................ page 81 0 [HARMONY] .................................................page 87

Auto Accompaniment Section

! [ACMP ON] ................................................... page 69 @ [INTRO].........................................................page 66 # [MAIN A] .......................................................page 63 $ [MAIN B] .......................................................page 63 % [MAIN C] .......................................................page 63 ^ [MAIN D] .......................................................page 63 & [ENDING] ......................................................page 67

Metronome Section

* [BEAT] ...........................................................page 64 ( [METRONOME] ............................................ page 27 ) TEMPO [], [+] ............................................. page 27 q [TAP] ............................................................. page 65

Start/Stop Section

w [FADE IN/OUT] .....................................pages 67, 68 e [SYNCHRO] ..................................................page 65 r [START/STOP] .....................................pages 64, 67

Display Control Section

t [CONTRAST] ................................................page 10

y PAGE [<], [>] ..............................................page 20 u LCD display ..................................................page 16 i Left LCD buttons ..........................................page 18 oRight LCD buttons ........................................page 18 p LCD buttons..................................................page 17 Q [EXIT] ............................................................page 21 W [DIRECT ACCESS] ......................................page 22 EData dial .......................................................page 17 R [], [+] ............................................................page 17

Main Mode Control Section

T [SONG] ....................................................... page 114 Y [MIXER] ........................................................page 24 U [MASTER EQUALIZER] (CVP-109/107/700) .. page 25

PHONESPHONESMIC. VOL. MIN MAX

MIC.

MIC/LINE

CVP-109 CVP-107 CVP-700 CVP-105zx

c

v v

THRUOUTIN

MIDI

HOST SELECT

MIDI Mac PC-1PC-2

TO HOSTPEDAL

AUX IN

RR

AUX OUT

L/L+R L/L+R

b

nm. ,

/

CVP-105 R

AUX IN EXP.

PEDAL VIDEO OUT VIDEO SELECT

RL/L+R L/L+R AUX OUT

TO HOST HOST SELECT

MIDIMac PC-2PC-1

IN

PAL NTSC

OUTTHRU MIDI

b n m

, / Z

X

.

CVP-109 CVP-107 CVP-700

CVP-109

1 0

13CVP-109/107/105/700

Panel Controls and Terminals

C V B

I [FUNCTION] ...............................................page 188

Guide Control Section

O [EASY PLAY] ..............................................page 125 P [NEXT NOTE] .............................................page 125 a [SOUND REPEAT] .....................................page 126

Song Control Section

s [PAUSE] ......................................................page 124 d [REW] .........................................................page 124 f [FF] .............................................................page 124 g [PLAY/STOP] .............................................. page 115 h [REC] ..........................................................page 133

Voice Section

j VOICE buttons ............................................. page 31 k [DUAL] ..........................................................page 38 l [SPLIT] ..........................................................page 41 ; [REVERB] .....................................................page 46 A [CHORUS] ....................................................page 51 S [EFFECT] ..............................................pages 54, 58

Registration/One Touch Setting Section

D [1] through [4] .....................................pages 90, 109 F BANK [] [+] ................................................page 108 G [ONE TOUCH SETTING] ............................. page 90 H [REGISTRATION] .......................................page 109

J [DISK IN USE] lamp ....................................... page 9

K Floppy disk drive (3.5) .................................. page 9

L [POWER] ...................................................... page 11

: Keyboard guide lamps ...............................page 129

Microphone and Headphone Connectors

z [MIC. VOL.] (CVP-109/107/700) ................page 213 x [MIC.] (CVP-109/107/700) .........................page 213 c [MIC/LINE] (CVP-109/107/700) .................page 213 v [PHONES]...................................................page 213

Connectors

b [TO HOST] ..................................................page 216 n [HOST SELECT].........................................page 216 mMIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ...........................page 216 , AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] ................................page 215 . AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] ....................................page 214 / [EXP. PEDAL] (CVP-109/107/700) .............page 215 Z [VIDEO OUT] (CVP-109/107/700) .............page 215 X [VIDEO SELECT] (CVP-109/107/700) ......page 215

Pedals

C Soft pedal .....................................................page 45 V Sostenuto pedal ...........................................page 45 BDamper pedal ...............................................page 45

CVP-109

F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

POWER

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

o

Q

E

P a

s

k l ; A S

d f Dh F H

J K

L

:

G

g

j

W

R

U IT Y

O

1 1

14 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova features a total of 50 demo songs: 4 feature songs, 24 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 22 pieces showcasing the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the Clavinova can do.

X Select the desired play mode. ............................................................

Select the desired play mode by pressing the rightmost LCD button. The following three modes are available:

ALL All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

RANDOM All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

SINGLE Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.

Z Call up the Demo Play mode. ..............................................................

Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears.

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

C Select the song and start playback..............................................

When you select a song, the demo automatically starts playing in the selected play mode. There are three ways to select a demo song, as de- scribed below:

You can also start the demo playback, beginning with the first feature song, by pressing [START/STOP] or [PLAY/ STOP].

For a complete list of the Clavinovas demo songs, refer to page 9 of the Reference Booklet.

(A) To listen to one of the featured demo songs, press one of the buttons under the numbers 1 through 4 in the display.

The current song number is highlighted during playback.

Playing the Demo Songs

1 2

15CVP-109/107/105/700

(B) To listen to a voice demo, press the VOICE button corre- sponding to the desired voice category.

Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category. The lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes.

There are two demo songs for each voice category. To skip to the second song, press the flashing button a second time.

(C) To listen to a style demo, press the STYLE button cor- responding to the desired style category.

Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category. The lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes.

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS SAX / FLUTE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

VOICE

There are two demo songs for each style category. To skip to the second song, press the flashing button a second time.

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

V Adjust the volume. ..........................................................................................

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume. The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control cannot be used.

B Stop the demo playback. .........................................................................

To change songs during playback: Press the LCD button, VOICE button, or STYLE button of another song; the song then changes. When ALL or RANDOM is selected as the play mode, the Clavinova will play other songs when the selected song is finished.

To stop playback, press either [START/STOP] or [PLAY/STOP], or the LCD button corresponding to the song thats currently playing.

N Exit the Demo mode......................................................................................

To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]).

Playing Along with the Demo Songs You can play the keyboard while a demo song is playing back. You

can also change the tempo (page 27) and use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] buttons. When you play 3. Lyric Demo, the Clavinova will display the lyrics so you can sing (as well as play) along; if you sing into a microphone connected to the CVP-109/107/700, you can use the Vocal Harmony function to add harmony to your vocals. Also, you can use the Guide function (page 125) while the Clavinova is playing 4. GUIDE Demo. You cannot change the voice selection while the demo is play- ing, however.

Demo song data is not output through the [MIDI OUT] terminal; however, your keyboard performance data is output.

Playing the Demo Songs

1 3

16 CVP-109/107/105/700

You will refer to the LCD display frequently as you operate your Clavinova. This section consists of a short tutorial that will help you learn how to read the LCD display and use the related controls.

Many of the Clavinovas functions are displayed at the bottom of the LCD. The main display shown below contains two functions: KBD VOL and RIGHT1 VOICE. These items are displayed in rounded rectangles, which means they represent settings that can be changed.

Selecting a Function

Main display Remember, the main display is the dis- play that appears first when you turn the power on.

Before you can change a functions setting, however, you have to select it first. In the main display, the RIGHT1 VOICE function is highlighted, indi- cating that this function is currently selected.

Highlighted items Selected items are highlighted (i.e., white letters on a dark background).

To select a function, press and quickly release the LCD button directly below that function. For example, you can select KBD VOL by pressing the leftmost LCD button. LCD buttons

The five LCD buttons under the LCD display represent different functions, depending on the contents of the display.

Press to select.

CHAPTER 2: Basic Operation Using the LCD Display Controls

1 4

CVP-107/700

17CVP-109/107/105/700

There are several ways to change a functions value. Here are two of the main ways:

Using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons .................................

Once you have selected a function, you can change its setting with the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons. Since you have just selected KBD VOL, try turning the dial or pressing the [] button until it reads 0.

Changing a Setting

You can press the [] and [+] buttons repeatedly to change the value a little, or hold them down to change it quickly.

The KBD VOL function sets the keyboard volume. When you set it to 0, you will find that the keyboard wont produce any sound, no matter how high you set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider!

Refer to page 23 for details on the KBD VOL function.

Using the LCD buttons..................................................................................

You can also increase a setting by simply pressing and holding the corresponding LCD button. For now, since youll want to hear your key- board later on, press and hold the leftmost LCD button until the value for KBD VOL is back up to 127.

This is why you should release the LCD button quickly when you select a func- tion: you could end up raising its value when you want to lower it!

Once youve got the keyboard volume back where it belongs, you can learn about a couple of other ways to change settings.

Hold down to increase.

Using the LCD Display Controls

1 5

18 CVP-109/107/105/700

You can use either of the methods described previously to change the current voice selection. Just press RIGHT1 VOICE and hold the button down, or use the data dial or the [+] button to scan through the options. Try listening to a few of the voices while youre at it

Changing a Setting in a Menu Display

Voice A voice is one of the sounds the Clavinova uses to make music.The problem with this method is that it can be hard to find the voice youre looking

for after all, the Clavinova has more than 600 voices! So youll probably want to use a menu display to see what your choices are. Try pressing the [PIANO] button now.

When you press one of the VOICE buttons, the LCD displays a two-column menu listing the voices of that type. You should now be looking at a menu of piano voices.

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER

Using the and LCD buttons .......................................................................

This display has one function, VOICE, that corresponds to two LCD buttons labeled and . You can use these buttons to select a different piano voice, much as you would use the [] and [+] buttons.

Using the left and right LCD buttons............................................................

You may have noticed that each item in the menu corresponds to one of the but- tons to the left and right of the LCD. You can press one of these buttons to select the corresponding menu item directly which is much quicker than using the and buttons.

Left and right LCD buttons The buttons to the left and right of the LCD are referred to as the left and right LCD buttons.

As you can see, the menu display lets you select voices using any of a number of controls: the two rightmost LCD buttons, any of the left and right LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons. Try selecting different piano voices in this display before you move on.

Using the LCD Display Controls

Refer to page 31 for more details about selecting voices.

Use any of the shaded controls to select a voice.

1 6

19CVP-109/107/105/700

After you have changed a functions value, you may find you want to restore its basic setting. To demonstrate this, well have to look at another of the Clavinovas displays. Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Resetting a Functions Value

Basic settings The functions of the Clavinova are set

to certain standard values or standard conditions when the instrument is shipped. These settings and conditions are called the basic settings.

A functions basic settings are gener- ally noted in the sidebar together with the possible settings for that function.

You can also use the Recall function (page 207) to restore basic settings at any time.

This button calls up one of the Clavinovas FUNCTION displays. You can use this display to tune and transpose the keyboard.

MIXER FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZERSONG

Refer to page 188 for details on the TUNE and TRANSPOSE functions.

The TUNE function in this display has and LCD buttons like the ones you used in the VOICE SELECT display. You can use these buttons to tune the keyboard up or down. Press and hold the button (or use the data dial or the [] button) to tune the keyboard down as far as it will go.

If you play a few notes, youll notice that your Clavinova is flat by quite a bit. Now, lets assume that you want to reset the keyboard to the standard 440.0 Hz. You could use the button (or the data dial, or the [+] button) to return the value to its basic setting but theres an easier way:

When a function has a basic setting, you can reset it to that value by pressing both the and buttons (or both the [] and [+] buttons) si- multaneously. Try doing this now.

There are some functions whose settings cannot be returned to the basic value by pressing the and buttons (or [] and [+] buttons) simultaneously.

When youve got the keyboard back in tune, youre ready to go on to the next operation.

Using the LCD Display Controls

1 7

20 CVP-109/107/105/700

Whereas the and buttons of the VOICE function you used in the VOICE SELECT display change the menu selection, those of the TUNE function do not. The menu items in the FUNCTION display are not related to the TUNE function; instead, they represent different FUNCTION display pages. If you look again at the top of the display, youll see that youre look- ing at a display named FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1], and its apparently the first of many function displays.

Displaying a Different Page

Display pages Some displays are divided into two or more pages, indicated by a series of overlapping boxes in the upper right corner of the display. The number in the topmost box is the number of the current display page.

Remember that you can always select menu items using the left and right LCD buttons. Press the left LCD button that corresponds to PEDAL in the menu.

This button displays the FUNCTION [PEDAL] page, which you can use to adjust the operation of your Clavinovas pedals. But wait the box in the upper right corner says this is page 3! We seem to have skipped right past page 2

When a display is divided into pages, you can use PAGE buttons to change pages. Try pressing the [<] button now to see page 2.

Page 2 is FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2], another page of keyboard set- tings. You can use the page buttons to select different pages of multi-page displays, not only in FUNCTION mode, but also in certain VOICE SELECT and STYLE SELECT displays. But dont change the page yet: were going to use page 2 to discuss the next operation.

Using the LCD Display Controls

Refer to page 190 for details about the functions on the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display page.

1 8

PAGE

21CVP-109/107/105/700

In addition to the FIXED VELOCITY function, which is selected in this display, the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] page has two functions in normal rectangles: KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING. Such functions cannot be selected; instead, pressing the corresponding LCD button changes the setting directly without selecting the function.

By pressing the LCD button under KEY TOUCH, for example, you can set the Clavinovas response to how hard you play. The value displayed in the rectangle switches from NORMAL to SOFT, then FIXED, then HARD but the FIXED VELOCITY function remains selected.

Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles

For more details on the KEY TOUCH function, refer to page 189.

The VOICE SETTING function determines whether reverb, chorus, effect, and other settings are automatically selected when a voice is se- lected. It works a little differently: when you press the LCD button, the highlighted setting switches between AUTO and MANUAL. Still, FIXED VELOCITY remains selected.

For more details on the VOICE SETTING function, refer to page 189.

There are other sorts of functions that are displayed in non-rounded rectangles, like the ones you used to select a demo song in Demo mode (see page 14). The important thing to remember about these functions is that you dont select them, you execute them.

Now were ready to return to the main display. First, however, set the KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING functions back to NORMAL and AUTO, respectively.

To exit the current display, press the [EXIT] button.

Exiting to the Main Display

You can usually use [EXIT] to get back to the main display. In some cases, how- ever, this button will return you to a previ- ous setting display instead. When this happens, pressing [EXIT] again will get you back to the main display.

The main display should show the name of the last piano voice that you selected in the VOICE SELECT [PIANO] display.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

Using the LCD Display Controls

The FIXED VELOCITY function is de- scribed on page 189.

1 9

22 CVP-109/107/105/700

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

Using the LCD Display Controls

2 0

The last function we need to discuss is Direct Access. The [DIRECT AC- CESS] button lets you jump directly to pages with particularly useful settings. When you press [DIRECT ACCESS], the Press a button to display corresponding settings message will appear in the LCD display.

Using the Direct Access Function

This message will remain onscreen for about three seconds. Press the button corresponding to the settings you want to display before the mes- sage disappears.

Here is a list of pages you can access with Direct Access:

You can also press an appropriate button while holding down the [DIRECT AC- CESS] button.

A Word about Messages For ease of operation, the Clavinova displays various messages (like the message displayed by the Direct

Access function as described above) that either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or in- form you that the last operation is not effective, valid, or appropriate. When such messages appear, follow the instructions as shown. For details about each message, please refer to the Messages section on page 221.

Saving Your Changes Now that youve started learning how to change the Clavinovas settings, you may be wondering whether it

will remember the changes youve made even after youve turned the power off. The answer is yes but you need to tell it which settings you want it to remember.

By default, the Clavinova will not remember most of your setting changes. You have two ways to tell it which settings you want to remember:

You can register your settings with the Registration function (page 108). Once you have registered your settings, you can restore them at any time by pressing a couple of buttons.

You can instruct the Clavinova to remember certain settings when the power is off, and recall these settings when you turn the power back on. To do this, you need to change the settings of the Backup function (page 206).

(1) When RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in the main display.

(2) When RIGHT2 VOICE is selected in the main display.

(3) When LEFT VOICE is selected in the main display.

(4) Selects whichever page was most recently displayed.

[DIRECT ACCESS] plus: Displays: See page: [VOCAL HARMONY] VOCAL HARMONY (CVP-109/107/700) 176

[ACMP ASSIST] ACMP ASSIST 81 [HARMONY] HARMONY 87 [ACMP ON] ACCOMPANIMENT MODE 71

[METRONOME] METRONOME 28 KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] (1) 36

Any VOICE button KEYBOARD [RIGHT2](2) 36 KEYBOARD [LEFT](3) 36

[DUAL] KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] 39 [SPLIT] KEYBOARD [LEFT] 42

[REVERB](4)

NATURAL REVERB (CVP-109) 47 REVERB 47

REVERB DEPTH 50 [CHORUS] CHORUS 52

[EFFECT](4)

EFFECT 1 (CVP-109/107/700) 55 EFFECT 2 (CVP-109/107/700) 55

EFFECT (CVP-105) 58 [1], [2], [3], or [4] REGISTRATION [NAME] 111

[REGISTRATION] REGISTRATION [FREEZE] 110

23CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has two sliders that let you adjust the overall volume and the accompaniment or song playback volume. There are also settings that you can use to adjust the keyboard volume and the volume of each part of the automatic accompaniment or song.

Adjusting the Overall Volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the overall volume of the Clavinova.

The [MASTER VOLUME] slider also determines the output level of the signal at the [PHONES] jack.

Signals input to the AUX IN jacks are also affected by the [MASTER VOL- UME] setting; however, signals output via the AUX OUT jacks are not.

Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL- UME] slider to set the playback volume of the automatic accompa- niment and songs.

Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume

This control has no effect on the volume of your keyboard performance.

Select KBD VOL in the main display, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the keyboard volume.

Setting the Keyboard Volume

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Adjusting the Volume

2 1

24 CVP-109/107/105/700

Call up the MIXER display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer display, the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a song can be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the previous display.

There are two types of mixer display, as shown below.

Automatic Accompaniment Mixer

This MIXER display ap- pears when youre not using the Song mode. See Adjust- ing Individual Part Levels (page 77) for details.

Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels

You can control the volume of your keyboard performance with your foot, by connecting the optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller to the [EXP.PEDAL] jack of the Clavinova.

Using an Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700)

Press the pedal down to increase the volume.

Song Mixer

This MIXER display appears in the Song mode. See Adjusting Individual Track Levels (page 120) for details.

R EXP. PEDAL

VID OU

Adjusting the Volume

2 2

CVP-109/107/700

25CVP-109/107/105/700

You can adjust the sound timbre of the CVP-109/107/700 using the Master Equalizer function.

Z Call up the MASTER EQUALIZER display. .............................

Press the [MASTER EQUALIZER] button. The buttons lamp lights, and the MASTER EQUALIZER display appears. You can use the five-band equalizer in this display to fine-adjust the timbre of the sound.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

MASTER EQUALIZER

Changing the Master Equalizer Settings

X Select the type of equalization. .........................................................

Use the left and right LCD buttons to select the equalizer setup that you will use as the basis for your settings. Six different setups are avail- able: FLAT, JAZZ, POPS, ROCK, CLASSIC, and STANDARD.

SONG MIXER FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZER

Equalizer setup Basic setting: STANDARD

The lowest band for the selected setup is selected, and the gain for that band is displayed by the GAIN function. The gain becomes 0 for all frequencies

when FLAT is selected.

80 Hz band selected Gain

Adjusting the Timbre (CVP-109/107/700)

2 3

26 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Select the band to be adjusted. ........................................................

Select the band you wish to adjust by pressing the BAND < or > buttons.

The central frequency of the selected band (expressed in Hz) is displayed by the BAND function.

V Change the gain value. ...............................................................................

Change the value of the gain either by pressing the GAIN and buttons, or by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

Gain Settings: 12 0 +12 (dB) Basic setting: varies depending on

equalizer setup and band. Backup of last settings: OFF Distortion could result if the gain is set

to higher levels. If this happens, re- duce the overall volume with the [MAS- TER VOLUME] control.

The new value is shown in the GAIN section of the display.

Since the value can be changed during playback, you can adjust the settings while listening to the changes in the sound.

When you change a gain value, an asterisk (*) will appear near the name of the selected equalizer setup to indicate that the settings have been changed. By default, these settings will not be retained when the power is turned off. If you want the Clavinova to retain your settings while the power is off, you can turn on the BACKUP function for the VOICE SETTING parameter group (page 206).

When equalizer setting values are contained in the song data, or when the equalizer setting data is received via MIDI, the current settings in the MAS- TER EQUALIZER display will be overridden by the settings of the song data or MIDI data. Set EQ LOCK to ON to prevent reception of this data, or OFF to enable reception.

Using the Equalizer Lock Function

EQ LOCK Settings: ON, OFF Basic setting: OFF

Adjusting the Timbre (CVP-109/107/700)

2 4

27CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova features a convenient metronome that is ideal for practicing. The procedure for setting the metronome tempo can also be used to set the playback tempo for the Auto Accompaniment (page 63) and Song (page 113) modes.

You can start the metronome and set the tempo from any display, including the main display.

Starting and Stopping the Metronome .......................................

Using the Metronome

The metronome can also be used during playback in Auto Accompa- niment (page 63) or Song mode (page 113).

The metronome cannot be used when playing disk software that was recorded in free-tempo (see page 116).

To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

METRONOME

The [METRONOME] lamp lights, and the metronome starts keeping time (indicated by the flashing of the BEAT lamps).

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

Tempo Range: 32 280 Basic setting: Depends on style.

The tempo indication in the main display is highlighted, and the tempo changes.

Restoring the Basic Tempo You can restore the preset tempo for the currently selected style by simul- taneously pressing both TEMPO [] and [+] buttons.

You can either press TEMPO [] or [+] buttons briefly to change the tempo value by one, or hold down the button to change it continuously.

When the tempo is highlighted in the display, you can also use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to set the tempo.

Using the Metronome

During Style or Song Playback If a style or song is started while the

metronome is playing, the metro- nome will continue to sound along with the style or song.

The metronome uses the time signa- ture of the style or song instead of the BEAT setting during style or song playback.

The metronome stops when the style or song stops.

2 5

Adjusting the Tempo ......................................................................................

The current tempo, indicated in the upper left corner of the display, de- pends on the selected style (see page 62). To change the tempo, press the TEMPO [] and [+] buttons.

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

Slower Faster

Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome.

28 CVP-109/107/105/700

You can change the metronomes time signature and volume using the settings in the METRONOME page.

Displaying the Metronome Settings ..............................................

To display the METRONOME page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [METRONOME].

Changing the Metronome Settings

METRONOME RESET

TEMPOEXIT DIRECT ACCESS

The METRONOME display appears.

Setting the Beat (Time Signature) ....................................................

BEAT Settings: NORMAL, 2 5 Basic setting: NORMAL

Use the BEAT and buttons to change the time signature. (If the BEAT function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.)

When NORMAL is selected, the metronome ticks steadily at the current tempo with no accented beats.

When BEAT is set to 2, 3, 4, or 5, the metronome ticks off measures with the selected number of beats, playing a bell sound on the first beat of each measure.

Setting the Metronome Volume ..........................................................

VOLUME Range: 0 127 Basic setting: 64

Use the VOLUME and buttons to change the metronome volume. (If the VOLUME function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.)

The volume of the metronome is determined by both the VOLUME func- tion and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider (except in Song mode, in which case the volume of the metronome is not affected by the slider). If you use the slider, the playback volume for the Automatic Accompaniment (page 62) will also be affected.

Using the Metronome

2 6

29CVP-109/107/105/700

The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main functions of the Clavinova. You can select help topics from a menu displayed on the LCD, or press a button on the panel to get help information related to that control.

Z Call up the Help mode. ...............................................................................

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

HELP

While the Help mode is active, no other operations can be performed.

Press the [HELP] button.

The Help menu display appears.

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

X Select the language if necessary. ...................................................

The selected language is always backed up even after the power is turned off.

Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, JAPANESE, GER- MAN, FRENCH, or SPANISH) by pressing the fourth LCD button.

Using the Help Mode

2 7

30 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Select a help topic. .........................................................................................

Use the left LCD buttons or the and LCD buttons to select one of the following eight menu items.

The selected menu is highlighted. Press the LCD button under ENTER to enter your selection. The first page of the selected help information is displayed.

V Turn the pages and read the help information. ...............

Use the fourth LCD button to advance the page. You can also press the third LCD button if you want to go back and read the previous page.

Help Topics

Basic Operations Accompaniment Demo Songs Song Playback Voices Song Recording Styles Functions

B Exit the Help topic. ..........................................................................................

Press the LCD button under EXIT to return to the Help menu. You can select another menu item or panel button and read through other help topics.

N Exit the Help mode. ........................................................................................

To exit the Help mode and to go back to the main display at any time, simply press [HELP].

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

Using the Help Mode

2 8

31CVP-109/107/105/700

CHAPTER 3: Voices Selecting Voices

Exiting the Display To return to the main display, press [EXIT].

Backing Up the Selected Voice When the power is turned ON, the Grand

Piano voice is selected automatically. However, if the Backup function (page 206) is set to ON, the last selected voice will automatically be selected.

The last selected voice in each group can be retained in memory, even after turning off the power, when the Backup function (page 206) is set to ON.

The Clavinova features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a Keyboard Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.

Voice Types Clavinova Voices : 224 (CVP-109/107/700)

195 (CVP-105) XG Voices: 480 Organ Flutes Voices: 6 (CVP-109/107/700) Drum/SFX Kits: 13 (CVP-109/107/700)

12 (CVP-105)

* For a list of the voices, see page 3 in the Reference Booklet.

* The Clavinovas voices are divided into twelve groups, corre- sponding to the twelve VOICE buttons on the panel.

ZSelect the voice group. ............................................................................

Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE button.

The VOICE SELECT display appears.

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS SAX / FLUTE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

VOICE

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS SAX / FLUTE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

VOICE

2 9

32 CVP-109/107/105/700

XSelect the voice..................................................................................................

Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate left or right LCD button. The data dial and [] and [+] buttons can be also used.

You can also select the voice by pressing the VOICE and but- tons.

Some of the VOICE SELECT displays have several successive pages. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the various pages.

CPlay the selected voice. .............................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

Automatic Voice-related Settings Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited reverb, chorus, effect, and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that set- tings are not automatically selected by using the VOICE SETTING function (page 189).

You can also select a voice using the RIGHT1 VOICE function in the main display.

About Ensemble Voices The Clavinovas ensemble voices are rich, dual-like voices that you can play without entering the Dual mode (page 38.) Press the [Ensemble] button to display a menu of ensemble voices.

About XG Voices Yamahas XG format is a major new enhancement to the GM (General MIDI) System Level 1 format. It provides for more instrument sounds and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects. XG also ensures compatibility with future instruments and software. Press the [XG] button to display a

menu of XG voices. Press another VOICE button while

holding down the [XG] button to dis- play a list of XG voices in the corre- sponding category.

Selecting Voices from the Main Display

ZSelect the RIGHT1 VOICE function. ..............................................

If the RIGHT1 VOICE function is not already highlighted, press the fourth LCD button to highlight it.

XSelect the voice...................................................................................................

Select the voice using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons. You can also hold down RIGHT1 VOICE to advance the voice selection continu- ously. (When selecting a voice in this way, the voice can be selected not only from a certain voice group but from all voices.)

CPlay the voice. .......................................................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

Selecting Voices

3 0

33CVP-109/107/105/700

To call up the ORGAN FLUTES display, press the [ORGAN] button and select Organ Flutes in the VOICE SELECT [ORGAN] display. With the Organ Flutes function in this display, you can select from six different kinds of organ sounds, and even create your own organ sounds by editing these voices.

The edited voices can be backed up in sets of six by setting VOICE SETTING to ON (in the Function sections Backup parameter, page 206).

Selecting Organ Flutes Voices ............................................................

Select the desired voice by pressing the left/right LCD buttons in the ORGAN FLUTES display.

The settings of the selected voice are shown in the display. An asterisk (*) appears next to the voice name when the selected voice has been already edited.

Editing Organ Flutes Voices ..................................................................

The editing features in this function let you recreate organ voices by adjusting several footage settings, just as on conventional organs. Vari- ous organ voices can be created using the settings shown below.

FOOTAGE display Footage volume settings (eight continuous voices corresponding to con-

ventional organ footages)

Rotary speaker effect speed setting (FAST or SLOW)

ATTACK display Attack footage volume settings (three decay voices used as percussive

attack sounds)

LENGTH setting (length of attack sound for decaying voices) RESPONSE setting (speed of sound starting for continuous voices) Attack mode setting (EACH or FIRST)

Rotary speed effect A rich, swirling chorus effect, created by actual rotation of a speaker.

Attack sound A sharp, percussive sound at the begin- ning of a note.

Attack mode The manner in which the attack sound is output.

To create a percussive organ sound, adjust the volume of the decay sound and the attack length of attack sound to appropriate settings, then add them to the continuous voice. To recreate the sound of a pipe organ with a slow attack, set the RESPONSE to a large value.

Organ Flutes (CVP-109/107/700)

Selecting Voices

3 1

34 CVP-109/107/105/700

Editing the Voice ...............................................................................................

Select the desired voice for editing, then set each parameter. The ORGAN FLUTES display has two pages: [FOOTAGE] and [AT-

TACK]. Press the rightmost LCD button to change between the displays. Press the PRESET button in each display to instantly return to the pre- edited voice.

Making settings in the ORGAN FLUTES [FOOTAGE] dis- play

Footage volume settings Select the footage bar to be adjusted by using the CURSOR but- tons, then set the volume by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

Setting the speed of the rotary speaker effect Press the middle LCD button to change between FAST and SLOW.

To call up the [ATTACK] display, either press ATTACK or press the CURSOR > button when the cursor is at 1.

The FAST/SLOW function is only displayed when an effect (page 54) is being applied to the keyboard part playing the Organ Flutes voice.

If an effect type other than rotary speaker is applied to a part playing the Organ Flutes voice, the FAST/SLOW function switches the effect variation on or off (see page 56) instead of adjusting the speaker modulation speed.

Voice Type and Volume Image (About Organ Footages) The standard pitch is 8 feet. A setting of 4 feet is one octave higher

than 8 feet, 2 feet is two octaves higher, and 1 foot is three octaves higher; 16 feet is one octave lower.

16 -f

oo t

16 ,

5+ 1/

3- fo

ot

5 +1/3 ,

4- fo

ot

4 ,

2- 2/

3- fo

ot

2+ 2/3 ,

2- fo

ot

2 ,

1+ 1/

3- fo

ot

1+ 1/3 ,

1- fo

ot

1 ,

4- fo

ot

4 ,

2+ 2/

3- fo

ot

2+ 2/3 ,

2- fo

ot

2 ,

8- fo

ot

8 ,

Continuous tones Decay tones

Selecting Voices

3 2

35CVP-109/107/105/700

Making Settings in the ORGAN FLUTES [ATTACK] Display

Attack footage volume and LENGTH and RESPONSE settings Select the appropriate bar in the display by pressing the CURSOR buttons, then set the volume, LENGTH, or RESPONSE by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

Setting the Attack Mode Press the middle LCD button to change between the EACH and FIRST settings. When set to EACH, the attack sound is applied to all played notes. When set to FIRST, the attack sound is applied only to the first played note in a legato sequence, and is not applied to subsequent notes played in legato.

To call up the [FOOTAGE] display, either press FOOTAGE or press the CURSOR > button when the cursor is at 4.

Image of Attack Length and Response

Volume

Time

Continuous Tone

Greater response time Volume

Time

Decay Tone

Longer attack length

Attack length

Selecting Voices

3 3

36 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has eleven drum kits (ten on the CVP-105) and two SFX kits, found on display pages 2 and 3 of the [PERCUSSION] voice group. When one of the drum or SFX kits is selected, various drum, per- cussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys.

See the drum/SFX kit list on page 10 in the Reference Booklet for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

When a drum kit is selected, only the keys with drum or percussion symbols printed above them will sound.

When an SFX kit is selected, keys other than those which have been assigned a special effect sound will not produce any sound.

The Transpose (page 188), Tune (page 188) and Octave (pages 37, 39 and 43) functions do not affect the drum/SFX kits.

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display page to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the RIGHT1 VOICE function.

The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the RIGHT1 VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice.

Displaying the Main Voice Keyboard Settings .................

Z If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, make sure RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in the main display.

X Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any of the VOICE buttons.

The KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] page and the [RIGHT2] (page 39) or [LEFT] (page 42) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice

Keyboard Percussion

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS SAX / FLUTE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

VOICE

Selecting Voices

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

SYNTHE- SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS SAX / FLUTE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

VOICE

3 4

37CVP-109/107/105/700

X Adjust the volume of the main voice.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Setting the Volume of the Main Voice..........................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] page to change the volume of the main voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME Range: 0 127 Basic setting: 127

Setting the Octave of the Main Voice ...........................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you adjust the pitch of the main voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button.

The value changes each time you press the button.

OCTAVE Settings: 2 (2 octaves lower)

1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher)

Basic setting: 0

Setting the Stereo Position of the Main Voice ...................

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the main voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

The PAN function is highlighted.

PAN Settings: L R Basic setting: (center)

Selecting Voices

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic set- ting.

Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 189) to MANUAL.

3 5

38 CVP-109/107/105/700

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Dual Mode

To change the main voice while playing in Dual mode, select the RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner.

The Dual mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. You can also set the volume, octave, and stereo position for the second voice, and detune the second voice from the main voice to create a thicker sound.

Z Select the main voice. ..................................................................................

Select a voice in the normal way (page 31), then press [EXIT] to re- turn to the main display.

X Call up the Dual mode. ................................................................................

To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button.

The RIGHT2 VOICE function appears in the lower right corner of the LCD display, and the current second voice is displayed below and to the right of the main voice (after the plus sign).

Second Voice Range: All voices Basic setting: StringsSlow

If you use the VOICE buttons to select a voice while either the tempo or the KBD VOL function is highlighted, the voice you select will be used as the main voice.

Selecting the Second Voice

C Select the second voice. ..........................................................................

Select the second voice in the same manner as described for the main voice (page 31). To select the second voice, the RIGHT2 VOICE func- tion must be highlighted.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

DUAL

3 6

39CVP-109/107/105/700

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page to change the volume, octave, pan, and detune of the voice selected using the RIGHT2 VOICE function.

The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the RIGHT2 VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice.

Displaying the Second Voice Keyboard Settings...........

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [DUAL]. If the RIGHT2 VOICE function is selected in the main display, you can also display the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one of the VOICE buttons.

The KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 36) or [LEFT] (page 42) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

Setting the Volume of the Second Voice ..................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page to change the volume of the second voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME Range: 0 127 Basic setting: 127

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECTEXIT DIRECT ACCESS

X Adjust the volume of the second voice.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Setting the Octave of the Second Voice ...................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you adjust the pitch of the second voice up or down by one or two oc- taves. Press the OCTAVE button.

The value changes each time you press the button.

OCTAVE Settings: 2 (2 octaves lower)

1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher)

Basic setting: 0

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Dual Mode

Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 189) to MANUAL.

3 7

40 CVP-109/107/105/700

Setting the Stereo Position of the Second Voice...........

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the second voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

The PAN function is highlighted. PAN Settings: L R Basic setting: (center)

Detuning the Second Voice ...................................................................

The DETUNE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page lets you detune the pitch of the second voice slightly from that of the main voice, to produce an even richer sound.

Z Press the DETUNE button.

The DETUNE function is highlighted. DETUNE Range: 0 10 Basic setting: 5

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

X Adjust the detune depth.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the detune depth, or hold down the DETUNE button to increase the detune depth. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic set- ting.

Press the [DUAL] button to exit Dual mode.

The [DUAL] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays in Dual mode.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Dual Mode

3 8

Exiting the Dual Mode

41CVP-109/107/105/700

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard Split Mode

The Split mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two different voices with each hand. For example, you can play the bass with your left hand and the piano with your right hand.

Z Select the main voice. ...................................................................................

Select a voice in the normal way (page 31), then press [EXIT] to re- turn to the main display. The voice you select will be played by the right range of the keyboard.

X Call up the Split mode. .................................................................................

To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button.

The LEFT VOICE function appears in the bottom center of the LCD display, and the current left voice is displayed below and to the right of the main voice (after the slash). Also, the keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the split point lights.

C Select the left voice. ........................................................................................

Select the left voice in the same manner as described for the main voice (page 31). To select the left voice, the LEFT VOICE function must be highlighted.

Selecting the Left Voice

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SPLIT VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

3 9

Left Voice Range: All voices Basic setting: Acous.Bass 1

Split point The split point is the key that divides the right and left sides of the keyboard. You can change the split point using the SPLIT POINT function in the KEY- BOARD [LEFT] display page (page 43).

You can use the Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered1, or Fingered2 modes (page 72) of the Automatic Accompani- ment function while playing in Split mode. In this case, pressing the keys in the left range will play the Automatic Accompaniment voices as well as the left voice.

42 CVP-109/107/105/700

To change the main voice while playing in Split mode, select the RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner. If you use the VOICE buttons to select a

voice while either the tempo or the KBD VOL function is highlighted, the voice you select will be used as the main voice.

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the LEFT VOICE function. You can also select the keyboard range that is affected by the pedals, as well as the split point that separates the right and left ranges, using the functions in this page.

The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the LEFT VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice.

Displaying the Left Voice Keyboard Settings ....................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [SPLIT].

If the LEFT VOICE function is selected in the main display, you can also display the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one of the VOICE buttons.

The KEYBOARD [LEFT] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 36) or [RIGHT2] (page 39) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>]buttons.

Setting the Volume of the Left Voice ...........................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page to change the volume of the left voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME Range: 0 127 Basic setting: 127

Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

X Adjust the volume of the left voice.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard Split Mode

4 0

43CVP-109/107/105/700

OCTAVE Settings: 2 (2 octaves lower)

1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher)

Basic setting: +1

PAN Settings: L R Basic setting: (center)

PEDAL Settings: R (right only)

L (left only) L+R (both)

Basic setting: R

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard Split Mode

Setting the Octave of the Left Voice .............................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you adjust the pitch of the left voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button.

The value changes each time you press the button.

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Setting the Stereo Position of the Left Voice ......................

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you ad- just the stereo position of the left voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

The PAN function is highlighted.

Setting the Range Affected by the Right and Left Pedals.........................................................................................................................

The PEDAL function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you specify which ranges of the keyboard will be affected by the damper, glide, and pitch bend functions (CVP-109/107/700) controlled by the left and right pedals when playing in Split mode. Press the PEDAL button.

The value changes each time you press the button.

Changing the Split Point ............................................................................

You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display to set the split point at any desired key position. In Split mode, the left voice is played by all keys to the left of (and including) the split point.

The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2.

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Right range

Left range

SPLIT POINT Settings: Any key of the keyboard Basic setting: F#2

Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 189) to MANUAL.

See pages 190 and 191 for a list of the functions that can be controlled by the left and right pedals.

4 1

44 CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Press the SPLIT POINT button. The SPLIT function is highlighted.

X Change the split point. Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the split point, or hold down the SPLIT POINT button to move the split point to the right. Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously

Exiting the Split Mode

C3

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard Split Mode

The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point lights, and the key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT func- tion.

The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously. When you do so, the right range of the keyboard will play both the main voice and the second voice.

Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode. The [SPLIT] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays

in Split mode.

4 2

45CVP-109/107/105/700

Using the Pedals

The Clavinova has three pedals.

Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal.

Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held.

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal.

Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys. On the CVP-109/107/700, you can also set the damper pedal to bend the pitch of notes up or down using the RIGHT PEDAL func- tion (page 191).

Damper Pedal (Right)

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

Soft Pedal (Left)

Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play.

You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for exam- ple, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or use it to play Fill Ins. See page 190 for details.

The effect of the soft pedal may differ slightly depending on the selected voice.

4 3

46 CVP-109/107/105/700

CHAPTER 4: Reverb and Other Reverb

Reverb ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The lamp lights, and the reverb icon appears in the main display, followed by the name of the currently selected reverb type. The setting of the [REVERB] button has

no effect on song mode or Auto Accom- paniment playback, or on audio signals input via a microphone (CVP-109/107/ 700).

Current reverb type

To turn the reverb off, press [REVERB] again.

The lamp turns off, and the reverb icon and reverb type are no longer displayed.

Because the basic setting of the [REVERB] button depends on the voice, the reverb may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif- ferent voice.

To apply reverb to the keyboard part(s), press the [REVERB] button.

Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space anything from a room in a jazz club to a concert hall. The Clavinova lets you choose from a variety of reverb effects; the CVP-109 gives you the additional option of using the high-quality Natural Reverb effects of a caliber normally employed in profes- sional recording studios. Of course, you can set the depth of any reverb effect to your preference. With the CVP-109/107/700, you can also apply reverb effects to the signal from the microphone using the Vocal Harmony settings (see page 177).

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REVERB

Turning the Reverb On or Off

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

4 4

47CVP-109/107/105/700

Effects

On the CVP-109, the NATURAL REVERB display is page 1; the REVERB and REVERB DEPTH pages are num- bered 2 and 3, respectively.

X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the NATURAL REVERB page (CVP-109), the REVERB page, and the REVERB DEPTH page.

Changing the Reverb Settings

You can change the reverb type and depth using the REVERB and REVERB DEPTH display pages. With the CVP-109, you can also select a Natural Reverb effect from the NATURAL REVERB page.

Displaying the Reverb Settings .........................................................

Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].

If you are using the CVP-109, the LCD will display the NATURAL REVERB page, the REVERB page, or the REVERB DEPTH page.

If you press the [>] button while the REVERB DEPTH page is showing, the CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer to the other sections of this chapter for details on chorus and other effect set- tings.

Reverb

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECTEXIT DIRECT ACCESS

The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).

CVP-107/700

CVP-109

4 5

48 CVP-109/107/105/700

Reverb

You can also select a Natural Reverb type with the REVERB TYPE and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected Natural Reverb type is highlighted.

The Natural Reverb type selection affects all keyboard parts that use Natural Reverb. Different settings cannot be made for each part.

The depth of the Natural Reverb effect can be set separately for each part that uses the effect (page 50).

Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same reverb type is selected.

Because the basic setting of the Natural Reverb type depends on the current RIGHT1 VOICE setting, the Natural Reverb type may change automatically when you select a different main voice (see page 31).

Changing the Reverb System (CVP-109) .................................

You can assign each keyboard part to use either the Natural Reverb system or normal reverb using the functions in the NATURAL REVERB display (page 47).

Press the LCD button corresponding to the keyboard part whose reverb system you want to change. Select LEFT to change the reverb system for the left part, RIGHT1 for the main part, or RIGHT2 for the second part.

Reverb System Settings: N.REV (Natural Reverb),

REV (normal reverb) Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The selected function switches between REV and N.REV. If you switch a part to N.REV, it will use the Natural Reverb type selected in the NATURAL REVERB display.

If you switch a part to REV, it will use the reverb type selected in the REVERB display.

Because the basic settings of the reverb system functions depend on the current voice selection, these settings may change automatically when you select a different voice.

Changing the Natural Reverb Type (CVP-109) ...............

You can change the Natural Reverb type selection in the NATURAL REVERB display (page 47).

Use the left LCD buttons to select the desired Natural Reverb type.

Natural Reverb Type Settings: See table on page 218. Basic setting: Depends on voice.

4 6

49CVP-109/107/105/700

Use the REVERB TYPE and buttons to change the reverb type, or select the REVERB TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons. (You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select one of the reverb types listed in the display.)

The selected reverb type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the reverb type depends on the accompa- niment style, the reverb type may change automatically when you select a different style.

The reverb type selection affects all voices played by the keyboard or Auto Accompaniment. Different settings cannot be made for each part.

Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same reverb type is selected.

The reverb effect cannot be applied to the sounds input through the AUX IN [R] and [L/L+R] jacks.

It is also possible to apply reverb ef- fects to the keyboard voices using the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type List on page 219 for details.

If both the [REVERB] button and the [CHORUS] and/or [EFFECT] buttons are turned on, all effects will be ap- plied.

Setting the Total Depth ................................................................................

The overall depth of the selected reverb effect(s) can be set using the TOTAL DEPTH function in the REVERB display (page 47).

On the CVP-109, the TOTAL DEPTH setting determines the depth of both the Natural Reverb and normal reverb ef- fects.

Z Select the TOTAL DEPTH function.

The TOTAL DEPTH function is highlighted. TOTAL DEPTH Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 64

Reverb

Reverb Type Settings: See table on page 218. Basic setting: Depends on style.

Changing the Reverb Type .....................................................................

You can change the reverb type using the REVERB display (page 47).

CVP-107/700

X Set the total depth of the reverb effect(s).

You can change the setting using the TOTAL DEPTH and but- tons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons. To reset the value to the basic setting of 64, simultaneously press either the TOTAL DEPTH and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons.

The TOTAL DEPTH setting globally affects all voices. Different settings cannot be made for each voice.

You can also set the reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accom- paniment parts, and for each keyboard part. (See the next operation.)

4 7

50 CVP-109/107/105/700

Reverb

Z Select a part.

Press the LCD button corresponding to RHYTHM to set the reverb depth for the drum part, or ACMP to set it for all other accompani- ment parts. Select LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the reverb depth for the corresponding keyboard part.

You can also select several parts at once and adjust their settings simulta- neously.

On the CVP-109, the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 settings also set the depth of the Natural Reverb effects. The selected function is highlighted.

X Set the reverb depth. RHYTHM and ACMP Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 64

LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: Depends on voice.

Set the reverb depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

The amount of reverb that is applied to a part depends on both the part depth and TOTAL DEPTH settings. If one of the settings is 0, no reverb will be applied to that part even if the other setting is 127.

Because the basic settings of the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 func- tions depend on the voices selected, a reverb depth setting may change automatically when you select a different part.

Setting the Reverb Depth for Each Part....................................

The settings in the REVERB DEPTH display (page 47) let you set the reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, as well as the parts you play from the keyboard.

CVP-107/700

4 8

51CVP-109/107/105/700

Chorus The Clavinovas chorus effects let you modify the voices you play from the keyboard, adding warmth for an even richer sound. Flanger effects add pronounced modulation, for a spacy futuristic quality. You can choose from a variety of chorus and flanger effects, and set the depth of the effect added to each keyboard voice. With the CVP- 109/107/700, you can also apply the selected chorus effect to the signal from the microphone using the Vocal Harmony settings (see page 178).

To apply chorus to the keyboard part(s), press the [CHORUS] button.

Turning the Chorus On or Off

Chorus ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The lamp lights, and the chorus icon appears in the main display, followed by the name of the currently selected chorus type. The setting of the [CHORUS] button has

no effect on song mode or Auto Accom- paniment playback, or on audio signals input via a microphone (CVP-109/107/ 700).

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

Current chorus type

To turn the chorus off, press [CHORUS] again.

The lamp turns off, and the chorus icon and chorus type are no longer displayed.

Because the basic setting of the [CHORUS] button depends on the voice, the chorus may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice.

You can change the current chorus type and depth using the CHO- RUS display page.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

CHORUS

4 9

52 CVP-109/107/105/700

If you press the [<] button or the [>] button while the CHORUS page is show- ing, the REVERB DEPTH page or the EFFECT 1 page (the EFFECT page on the CVP-105) will be displayed. Refer to the other sections of this chapter for details on reverb and other effect set- tings.

Changing the Chorus Type ....................................................................

You can change the chorus type selection in the CHORUS page. Se- lect the chorus type using the left and right LCD buttons.

Chorus Type Settings: See table on page 219. Basic setting: Depends on style.

You can also change the chorus type using the CHORUS TYPE and buttons, or by selecting the CHORUS TYPE function and using the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected chorus type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the chorus type depends on the accompa- niment style, the chorus type may change automatically when you select a different style.

The chorus type selection affects all keyboard parts. Different settings cannot be made for each part.

Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same chorus type is selected.

It is also possible to apply chorus effects to the keyboard voices using the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type List on page 219 for details.

If both the [CHORUS] button and the [REVERB] and/or [EFFECT] buttons are turned on, all effects will be ap- plied.

Chorus

Changing the Chorus Settings

Displaying the Chorus Settings .....................................................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [CHORUS] to display the CHO- RUS display page.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECTEXIT DIRECT ACCESS

The LCD displays the CHORUS page.

5 0

CVP-107/700

CVP-107/700

53CVP-109/107/105/700

Setting the Chorus Depth for Each Part ...................................

The other settings in the CHORUS page let you set the chorus depth separately for each part you play from the keyboard.

Z Select a part.

Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the chorus depth for the corresponding keyboard part.

You can also select several parts at once and adjust their settings simultaneously.

The selected function is highlighted.

X Set the chorus depth. Chorus Depth functions Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: Depends on voice.

Set the chorus depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons. Because the basic settings of the chorus depth functions depend on the voices selected, a chorus depth setting may change automatically when you select a different voice.

Chorus

5 1

CVP-107/700

54 CVP-109/107/105/700

Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)

The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild, special effects. The CVP-109/107/700 features two complete effect systems, which you can apply individually to any of the voices you play from the keyboard. You can adjust the depth of the effects as desired. The CVP-109/107/700 also applies an independent effect to the signal from the microphone; settings for this effect system can be made in the VOCAL HARMONY display (page 179).

You can use the [EFFECT] button to turn effects on or off for the keyboard parts.

ZSelect a part in the main display. ....................................................

If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, press the LCD button corresponding to the keyboard part whose effect you want to turn on.

The selected function is highlighted.

Turning the Effects On or Off

XPress the [EFFECT] button....................................................................

Effect ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The lamp lights, and the effect icon appears in the main dis- play, followed by the name of the currently selected effect type.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

If both of the effect systems (page 55) are assigned to the same part, only the effect type selected in the EFFECT 1 page will be displayed.

Current effect type

Only the effect system assigned to the currently selected keyboard part is affected when you press the [EFFECT] button.

To turn both effect systems (page 55) on or off, you must perform this opera- tion twice, selecting each of the af- fected parts in turn.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

EFFECT

5 2

55CVP-109/107/105/700

If the lamp does not light, neither effect system has been assigned to the part in question. Check the PART function settings (page 57).

If the lamp lights but the sound of the voice does not change, the effect depth may have been set to 0. Check the effect depth settings (page 57).

The setting of the [EFFECT] button has no effect on song mode or Auto Accompaniment playback, or on audio signals input via a microphone (CVP- 109/107/700).

When an effect system is used by a song, it is automatically turned off for the keyboard part(s) when that song is selected for playback. If you press [EFFECT] to apply an effect to the keyboard part(s) after selecting the song, the effect will not be applied to the song.

To turn an effect off, select the part that uses that effect in the main display and press [EFFECT] again.

The lamp turns off, and the effect icon and effect type are no longer displayed.

Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the voice, the effect(s) may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice.

You can change the effect type, depth and affected part using the set- tings on the EFFECT pages.

Displaying the Effect Settings .............................................................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT] to display the EFFECT display pages.

Changing the Effect Settings

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EFFECT 1 page and the EFFECT 2 page. If you press the [<] button while the

EFFECT 1 page is showing, the CHO- RUS page will be displayed. Refer to the first two sections of this chapter for de- tails on reverb and chorus settings.

Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)

The LCD displays either the EFFECT 1 page or the EFFECT 2 page (whichever was selected most recently).

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

5 3

CVP-107/700

56 CVP-109/107/105/700

You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select one of the effect types listed in the display screen.

To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the EFFECT TYPE and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected effect type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.

If both the [EFFECT] button and the [REVERB] and/or [CHORUS] buttons are turned on, all effects will be applied.

Varying the Effect .............................................................................................

Each of the Clavinovas effect types has a variation that can be se- lected using the VARIATION functions in the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 displays (page 55). To vary the effect produced by the effect type se- lected for an effect system, display the EFFECT page for that system, then press the LCD button under VARIATION.

VARIATION Settings: OFF, ON Basic setting: Depends on voice.

Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)

Changing the Effect Type ..........................................................................

You can change the effect type selection for one of the effect systems in the appropriate EFFECT display (page 55). Select an effect type using the EFFECT TYPE and buttons, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

Effect Type Settings: See table on page 219. Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches be- tween OFF and ON, and the effect changes.

The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see the table on page 219). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIA- TION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may change automatically when you select a different voice.

5 4

57CVP-109/107/105/700

PART Settings: R1 (main)

R2 (second) LEFT OFF (no effect)

Basic settings: R1 (EFFECT 1) R2 (EFFECT 2) The value of the PART function changes, displaying each of the

settings (R1, R2, LEFT, and OFF) in turn.

Since the changing the value of the PART function means the effect will probably be applied to a different voice, the effect type (page 56) and effect depth (see below) may also change automatically to match the voice that is currently selected for the chosen part.

Setting the Effect Depth .............................................................................

The DEPTH function in each of the EFFECT pages lets you adjust the depth of the currently selected effect type. To set the depth of the effect produced by an effect system, select DEPTH in the appropriate EFFECT page, then and use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the value.

DEPTH Range: 0 (no effect) - 127 (max.) Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The DEPTH value changes.

You can also advance the value by holding down the DEPTH button. To reset the value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

Since the basic setting of the DEPTH function depends on the voice selected for the part affected by the effect system in question, the effect depth may change automatically when you select a different voice.

Setting the Affected Part .................................................................................

You can use the PART function in each EFFECT display to select the key- board part that is to be affected by the corresponding effect system. To change the part affected by one of the effect systems, display the EFFECT page for that system, then press the LCD button under PART.

Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)

When neither effect system has been assigned to the keyboard part that is currently selected in the main display, the [EFFECT] button cannot be used to turn an effect on.

5 5

The effect depth cannot be changed for certain effect types. In such cases a row of dashes ( - - -) is displayed as the DEPTH setting, and the DEPTH function cannot be selected.

58 CVP-109/107/105/700

Voice Effects (CVP-105)

The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild, special effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect as desired.

To apply the effect to the keyboard parts, press the [EFFECT] button.

Turning the Effects On

Effect ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice.

The lamp lights, and the effect icon appears in the main dis- play, followed by the name of the currently selected effect type.

Current effect type

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

When the effect system is also used by an accompaniment style or song, the effect being applied to the keyboard part(s) may automatically be turned off when you start the Auto Accompaniment or select the song for playback, depend- ing on the effect type selected by the style or song. If this happens, you may be able to apply the effect to the key- board part(s) by pressing the [EFFECT] button - again, this depends on the se- lected effect type. If you do so, the effect will not be applied to voices played by the Auto Accompaniment or song.

To turn the effect off, press [EFFECT] again.

The lamp turns off, and the effect icon and effect type are no longer displayed.

Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the voice, the effect may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif- ferent voice.

Changing the Effect Settings

You can change the current effect type and depth using the EFFECT display pages.

Displaying the Effect Settings ............................................................

ZPress [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT]. If you press the [<] button while the first EFFECT page is showing, the CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer to the first two sections of this chapter for details on reverb and chorus settings.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

The [EFFECT] lamp will not light if the effect depth (page 60) is set to 0.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

EFFECT

5 6

59CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Effect Type .........................................................................

You can change the effect type selection in the first EFFECT page (page 4 of the display). Select an effect type using the EFFECT TYPE and buttons, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

Effect Type Settings: See table on page 219. Basic setting: Depends on voice.

You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select one of the effect types listed in the display screen.

To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the EFFECT TYPE and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected effect type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.

The effect type selection affects all keyboard parts. Different settings cannot be made for each part.

When the basic setting of the [EF- FECT] button is ON for two or three voices selected in Dual and/or Split mode, the Clavinova will automatically select the most appropriate effect type and set the effect depth (page 60) for each part to an appropriate level.

Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same effect type is selected.

If both the [EFFECT] button and the [REVERB] and/or [CHORUS] buttons are turned on, all effects will be ap- plied.

Voice Effects (CVP-105)

The LCD displays the EFFECT page that was used most recently.

5 7

X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EF- FECT pages.

60 CVP-109/107/105/700

Effect Depth functions Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: Depends on voice.

X Set the effect depth.

Set the effect depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons. Because the basic settings of the effect depth functions depend on the voices selected, an effect depth setting may change automatically when you select a different voice.

Setting the Effect Depth for Each Part .......................................

The settings in the second EFFECT page (page 5 of the display) let you set the effect depth separately for each part you play from the keyboard.

Z Select a part.

Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the effect depth for the cor- responding keyboard part.

The selected function is highlighted.

Voice Effects (CVP-105)

The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches be- tween OFF and ON, and the effect changes.

The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see the table on page 219). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIA- TION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may change automatically when you select a different voice.

Varying the Effect .............................................................................................

Each of the Clavinovas effect types has a variation that can be se- lected using the VARIATION function in the first EFFECT page (page 4 of the display). To vary the effect produced by the selected effect type, press the LCD button under VARIATION.

VARIATION function Settings: OFF, ON Basic setting: Depends on voice.

5 8

61CVP-109/107/105/700

CHAPTER 5: Accompaniment Styles

Selecting Accompaniment Styles The Clavinova has a wide variety of musical styles that you can use for simple percussion accompaniment, or as the basis of a fully orchestrated accompaniment including bass and rhythm parts using the Auto Accompaniment feature (page 69). There is also a selection of Pianist styles that let you play with piano accompaniment when you activate the Auto Accompaniment.

Selecting a Style

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

Style Types Rhythm styles: 157 (CVP-109)

147 (CVP-107/700) 135 (CVP-105)

Pianist styles: 35 Custom styles: 12

* For information on the styles, see the Style List on page 12 in the Refer- ence Booklet.

* The Clavinovas styles are divided into eleven groups, corresponding to the eleven STYLE buttons on the panel.

* The PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group do not include drum sounds. Use the Auto Accompaniment (page 70) to play these styles.

Z Select an accompaniment style group. .....................................

Disk and Custom Styles The [DISK/CUSTOM] button lets you use styles on optional Style File Disks (page 105) or your original styles (page 91) .

Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE button.

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

The corresponding STYLE SELECT display appears. The last selected style in each group

can be retained in memory, even after turning off the power, when the Backup function (page 206) is set to ON.

When the power is turned on, the 8 Beat 1 style is automatically selected. However, if the Backup function (page 206) is set to ON, the last selected style will be selected instead.

Accompaniment styles cannot be selected in the Song Play mode (page 113).

(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

5 9

62 CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select a style. ..........................................................................................................................

Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate left or right LCD button. Accompaniment Tempo Whenever you select a style,

the preset tempo for that style is also selected (unless you change the style during playback, in which case the current tempo is main- tained).

Adjust the tempo as de- scribed on page 27.

Accompaniment Volume Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL- UME] slider to adjust the play- back volume, as described on page 23.

You can also select a style using the data dial, the [] and [+] buttons, or the STYLE and buttons.

Some STYLE SELECT displays consist of more than one page. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between pages.

C Return to the main display .......................................................................................

Press [EXIT] to return to the main display.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

PAGE

6 0

63CVP-109/107/105/700

You will use the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons and the START/ STOP buttons to select style variations and control style playback.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO

BRASS

DUAL SPLIT

SAX / FLUTE

FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 PLAY/ STOP

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASS

REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIR

3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

VOICE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ON INTRO FADE

IN/OUT

Each of the Clavinovas styles has four variations, corresponding to the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons labeled as [MAIN A], [MAIN B], [MAIN C], and [MAIN D].

Varying the Style

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING AUTO FILL

ACMP ON INTRO

Use these buttons to select style variations.

Main A is generally the most rudimentary form of the style; the other variations are more or less lavish embellishments on the same basic theme. By judiciously switching between variations as you play, you can add variety and make the performance more interesting.

Selecting a Variation ........................................................................................

You can select a style variation before you start playing the style. To select a variation, simply press the corresponding button.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING AUTO FILL

ACMP ON INTRO

The Clavinova will begin playing the selected style variation when you start the style using one of the methods described in the next section.

Playing Fill-in Patterns ..................................................................................

Fill-in patterns A fill-in pattern is a embellishment of the basic rhythm, usually played at the end of a musical phrase as an exciting transition into the next segment.

If you select a different style variation while the style is playing, the Clavinova will play an automatic fill-in pattern as it switches to the new variation. The fill-in pattern, like the main pattern, is different for each variation.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

The buttons lamp lights.

6 1

64 CVP-109/107/105/700

To change the variation while the style is playing, press the button corresponding to the new variation. Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to pause the style or play a special fill-in pattern by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to BREAK or BREAK FIL.

The buttons lamp flashes as the Clavinova plays the fill-in pattern.

Generally speaking, the Clavinova will start the fill-in pattern soon after you press the button. If you select a variation after the last eighth note of a measure, however, it will begin the fill-in pattern from the start of the next measure.

When the fill-in pattern is finished, the buttons lamp lights steadily as the Clavinova plays the main pattern.

The auto fill-in feature provides an exciting transition as you switch from one variation to another. If Main A is playing and you press [MAIN B], for example, the Clavinova will play Fill-in B, then start playing Main B.

You can also play fill-in patterns without selecting a different variation. Just press the button for the variation that is playing. The Clavinova will play the fill-in for that variation, then return to the main pattern.

More Fun With Fill-ins ....................................................................................

Changing the Fill-in It is possible to switch variations while a fill-in pattern is playing. The Clavinova will switch to the fill-in pattern for the new variation, then continue with the new main pattern as usual.

Repeating the Fill-in If you hold down the flashing button, or press it after the last eighth note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the fill-in pat- tern will be repeated.

Canceling the Fill-in If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the Clavinova will stop playing the fill-in pattern and continue with the main pattern.

Starting the Accompaniment Style

There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described below:

Standard Start .........................................................................................................

This is the simplest way to start a style. If necessary, select a variation as described on page 63, then press the [START/STOP] button.

Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to start and stop the style by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to START/ STOP.

The lamp lights and the style starts.

Beat Indicator During style playback, the leftmost beat lamp (red) flashes on the first beat of each measure, and the other lamps (green) flash for each successive beat. The current tempo and measure number are shown in the upper left corner of the main display.

START/STOP

SYNCHRO START/STOP FADE

IN/OUT

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

6 2

65CVP-109/107/105/700

Synchronized Start ............................................................................................

This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord on the keyboard.

Z Set the Synchronized Start function.

If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed while a style is playing, style playback stops and Synchronized Start is auto- matically set to stand-by.

When you play the keyboard in Split mode (page 41) or use the Auto Ac- companiment in a mode other than FULL KEYBOARD (page 73), only the left-hand section of the keyboard will trigger a synchronized start.

If necessary, select a variation as described on page 63, then press the [SYNCHRO] button.

START/STOP

SYNCHRO START/STOP FADE

IN/OUT

X Start playing. To cancel the Synchronized Start func- tion before you start the style, press the [SYNCHRO] button again.

When you are ready, play a note on the keyboard. The style starts playing when you play the first note.

The [SYNCHRO] lamp turns off, the [START/STOP] lamp lights, and the style starts.

Tap Start ........................................................................................................................

This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one opera- tion.

If necessary, select a variation as described on page 63, then tap the [TAP] button at the desired tempo. Tap four times for 2- and 4-beat styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-beat styles.

If you do not tap the [TAP] button the required number of times (i.e., 3 times for a 3-beat style), the Tap Start function will be canceled after a few seconds.

The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap click will not sound.

TAP

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

When playing a 4-beat style Tap 4 times.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

The lamp lights, and the red [BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the current tempo.

6 3

66 CVP-109/107/105/700

Adding an Introduction .................................................................................

This function lets you embellish the start of a tune by adding an intro- duction.

Z Set the introduction pattern.

Select the variation to play the intro pattern as described on page 63, then press the [INTRO] button. There are three introduction patterns, as shown below:

The [INTRO] lamp lights, and the lamp for the selected variation flashes. The flashing light indicates the variation

that will play after the intro. In the illustra- tion at left, the Clavinova will play Intro A, followed by Main A.

X Select the main pattern.

Select the variation to play the main pattern when the intro is fin- ished. (If you want the style to continue playing with the same varia- tion as the introduction, you can skip this step.)

The lamp for the previously selected button lights, and the lamp of the selected button flashes. Since the flashing light indicates the

variation that will play after the intro, the illustration at left indicates that the Clavinova will play Intro C/D, followed by Main A.

C Start the style.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING AUTO FILL

ACMP ON INTRO

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING AUTO FILL

ACMP ON INTRO

To cancel the introduction before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.Use one of the three methods described on the preceding pages to

start playing the style.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

6 4

Pattern Played by: Intro A [MAIN A] Intro B [MAIN B] Intro C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]

Intro Patterns

67CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button. Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to FADE IN/ OUT.

The lamp lights, and the Synchronized Start function (page 65) turns on automatically.

X Start the style.

START/STOP

SYNCHRO START/STOP FADE

IN/OUT

To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button again.

Use one of the three methods described on the preceding page to start playing the style.

The [FADE IN/OUT] lamp flashes during the fade-in, then turns off when the fade-in is completed.

There are also several ways to stop accompaniment style playback, as described below:

Standard Stop .........................................................................................................

To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button.

Stopping the Accompaniment Style

Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to start and stop the style by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to START/ STOP.

The lamp turns off and the style stops instantly.

START/STOP

SYNCHRO START/STOP FADE

IN/OUT

Adding an Ending ...............................................................................................

To play an ending pattern before the style playback stops, press the [ENDING] button.

If you press the [ENDING] button on or after the second beat of a measure, the ending pattern will start at the top of the next measure.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING AUTO FILL

Fading In .............................................................................................................................

This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the style. You can set the Fade In function at any time before you start the style, and use it in combination with any start method (including the Introduction function).

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

The ENDING lamp lights, and the Clavinova stops style playback after playing an ending pattern.

6 5

68 CVP-109/107/105/700

Fading Out ..................................................................................................................

You can have the style fade out and automatically stop by pressing the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to FADE IN/ OUT.

The lamp flashes as the style fades out.

You can use the Fade Out function in combination with any pattern (including the Introduction and Ending functions).

START/STOP

SYNCHRO START/STOP FADE

IN/OUT

The Clavinova will play one of three ending patterns, depending on the main pattern that is currently playing, as shown below.

Press [ENDING] a second time while the ending pattern is playing to produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) effect.

Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger the ending pattern and ritardando by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 190) to ENDING/RIT.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

6 6

Pattern Played by: Ending A [MAIN A] Ending B [MAIN B] Ending C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]

Ending Patterns

69CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord backing for your performance in 157 different styles (147 styles on the CVP-107/700; 135 on the CVP-105), as well as 35 different types of piano-only accompaniment.

The Auto Accompaniment playback data is normally not output by the MIDI [OUT] terminal. To send the Auto Accompaniment data to another MIDI instrument, use the ACMP&RHY and HARMONY functions in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display described on page 205.

You can use one of several methods to indicate the chords that are to be played by the Auto Accompaniment. Choose the accompaniment mode that best suits your playing style.

Using the Auto Accompaniment

Detailed explanations of each accompa- niment mode are given on pages 72 and 73.

Single Finger The Single Finger method makes it easy to obtain accompaniment in

major, seventh, minor, and minor-seventh chords by pressing certain keys (according to simple rules) to the left of the split point indicated by the keyboard guide lamp. (See page 72.)

Multi Finger When you select the Multi Finger mode, you can use either the Single

Finger method or the Fingered 1 method to indicate chords for the ac- companiment. (See page 72.)

Fingered 1 The Fingered 1 method lets you control the Auto Accompaniment by

playing full chords to the left of the split point. (See page 72.)

Fingered 2 This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered 1 mode, with

the exception that the lowest note played to the left of the split point is used as the bass root (in Fingered 1 mode, the root of the chord is always used as the bass root). Hence, you can select this mode to play on bass or fraction chords. (See page 73.)

Full Keyboard The Full Keyboard mode automatically produces appropriate auto-

matic accompaniment for virtually anything you play, anywhere on the keyboard. (See page 73.)

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

ACMP ON

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

6 7

70 CVP-109/107/105/700

You may want to select an accompaniment mode (page 71) before you start playing. If the accompaniment mode is set to your liking, you can start the Auto Accompaniment as follows:

Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................

Starting the Auto Accompaniment

Pianist styles You can play the PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group with the Auto Accompaniment (page 61). Since these styles do not contain drum parts, youll have to indicate a chord as you start the style to hear the accompaniment.

Select the desired style. (See page 61.)

X Set the tempo and accompaniment volume. ......................

Use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo (page 27), and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume of the accompa- niment parts (page 23).

C Turn on the Auto Accompaniment. ............................................... The Auto Accompaniment will auto-

matically turn on when you select a style in the Pianist style group.

The Auto Accompaniment can also be turned on during playback of song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700/103.

If you turn the Auto Accompaniment on while playing back songs recorded using the Auto Accompaniment, the recorded accompaniment track will be dropped in favor of the accompaniment you play on the keyboard.

Press the [ACMP ON] button.

The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 65). Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.

V Start the Auto Accompaniment. .......................................................

You can also select style variations and play fill-in patterns as described on page 63 while playing along with the Auto Accompaniment.

Press the [ACMP ON] button again to turn the Auto Accompaniment off before you start playing.

Begin playing to start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchro- nized Start function, or start the style using one (or more) of the other methods described on pages 64 and 67.

The methods used to indicate Auto Accompaniment chords are de- scribed in the following pages.

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment

Use one of the methods described on page 67 to stop playback of the style, including the Auto Accompaniment.

To turn Auto Accompaniment off, press the [ACMP ON] button so that the lamp goes out.

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

MAIN AACMP ON INTRO

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

The [ACMP ON] lamp lights, and the current accompaniment mode is indicated at the left edge of the main display.

6 8

71CVP-109/107/105/700

You can change the accompaniment mode (which selects the chord indication method), the split point, and other Auto Accompaniment set- tings in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display page.

Displaying the Auto Accompaniment Settings..................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ON].

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings

Selecting an Accompaniment Mode..............................................

Accompaniment Mode Settings: See insert below. Basic setting: MULTI FINGER

To select an accompaniment mode, press one of the left LCD buttons.

The method for indicating chords in each accompaniment mode are described in detail below.

The ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display appears.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

MAIN AACMP ON INTRO

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

The selected accompaniment mode is highlighted.

6 9

72 CVP-109/107/105/700

Accompaniment Modes

The Clavinova displays the names of the chords you play at the left edge of the main display, below the measure number.

The same accompaniment continues (even after you release the chord in the left range) until you play the next chord. Single Finger Chords

The following four chord types can be played in Single Finger mode:

The illustration below shows the key corresponding to each root note.

Major Press the root note of the chord.

Minor [m] Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any black key to the left of it.

Seventh [7] Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any white key to the left of it.

Minor Seventh [m7] Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any white and black keys to the left of it (three keys at once).

Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord.

Fingered 1 To control the Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range

of the keyboard (below and including the split point). Play the melody in the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment.

The automatic accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh).

If the Clavinova cannot recognize a chord you play, an asterisk * will appear instead of the chord name in the display.

Drums-only accompaniment can be produced by pressing any three con- secutive keys (e.g., C, C#, D) simulta- neously. This lets you create dynamic drum breaks in the accompaniment. A series of dashes - - - will appear instead of a chord name in the display.

Cm

C7

Cm7

C

Multi Finger This method allows you to control the Auto Accompaniment using

either the Single Finger method (described above) or the Fingered 1 method (described below). However, when indicating minor, seventh or minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black key nearest the root note of the chord.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

Single Finger To control the Auto Accompaniment, press one, two, or three keys in

the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point), fol- lowing the rules described below. Play the melody in the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment.

C D E F G A B

F# Ab Bb (Gb)(G#)(A#)

C# Eb (Db)(D#)

7 0

73CVP-109/107/105/700

Chords in Fingered 1 mode The chord types below can be played in Fingered 1 mode. For a fin- gering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see page 15 of the Reference Booklet.

Major Sixth [6] Major seventh [M7]

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)] Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)] Added ninth [add 9] Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)] Six ninth [6 (9)] Flatted fifth [(b5)] Augmented [aug] Seventh augmented [7 (#5)] Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)] Minor [m] Minor sixth [m6] Minor seventh [m7]

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)] Minor added ninth [m add 9]

Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)] Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)]

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 (b5)] Minor major seventh [mM7] Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)]

Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)] Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] Seventh ninth [7 (9)] Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)] Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)] Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)] Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)] Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)] Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)] Suspended fourth [sus4]

Fingered 2 To control the Auto Accompaniment, play chords in the left range of

the keyboard as for Fingered 1. In this mode, however, the lowest note you play in the will be used as the bass root, as shown at right.

Chords in Fingered 2 mode The Clavinova will recognize the same chord types as listed above for Fingered 1 mode.

Full Keyboard When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the Clavinova will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You dont have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the de- tected chord will appear in the display.

Although Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many types of music, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.

Chord detection occurs at approxi- mately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords less than an 8th note in length may not be detected.

Keep in mind You can use the Dual and Split modes together with the Auto Accompaniment.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

7 1

On-bass Chords

C C on E

C on G

74 CVP-109/107/105/700

Using the Synchronized Stop Function ...................................

The SYNCHRO STOP function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display automatically stops the Auto Accompaniment when youre not holding down any keys to the left of the split point.

Press the SYNCHRO STOP button to turn the function on.

This function can only be turned on if the Auto Accompaniment is on and Full Keyboard mode is not selected.

The SYNCHRO STOP function is highlighted, and the [SYNCHRO] lamp lights.

The Auto Accompaniment automatically starts when you play in the left range of the keyboard, and stops when you release it. This is useful for beginning players who

have difficulty playing in precise time. It is also effective for creating accompani- ment breaks during the performance.

To turn the function off, press SYNCHRO STOP again.

Changing the Split Point ............................................................................

You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display to set the split point at any desired key position. The keys to the left of (and including) the split point control the chords played by the Auto Accompaniment in every accompaniment mode except Full Keyboard.

SPLIT POINT function Settings: Any key of the keyboard Basic setting: F#2

Use the SPLIT POINT and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to change the split point.

Press either the and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons simulta- neously to restore the basic setting.

The split point cannot be set when Full Keyboard mode is selected.

Changing the split point here also changes it for the Split mode (see page 43).

The selected key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Right range

Left range

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

7 2

If the Auto Accompaniment or the Split mode (page 41) is on, the keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected split point lights.

75CVP-109/107/105/700

Getting Help With Chords .........................................................................

The CHORD ASSIST function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate fingerings for chords.

Chord Assistance The Chord Assistance feature is essen- tially an electronic chord book that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to quickly learn how to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the display, and the fingerings for the Fin- gered 1 method are indicated by the keyboard guide lamps.

Z Turn the Chord Assistance function on.

If the [ACMP ON] button is off, it will turn on.

If the split point is set below F#2, it will automatically be reset to F#2.

The keyboard guide lamps do not indicate the split point when Chord Assistance is on, since they are used to indicate chord fingerings instead.

Press the CHORD ASSIST button.

The CHORD ASSIST display appears, and the accompaniment mode automatically changes to Fingered 1.

X Start the Auto Accompaniment.

Press [START/STOP] or use the Synchronized Start function (page 65) to start the Auto Accompaniment.

C Enter the chord root.

ROOT function Settings: See sidebar on page 72.

Use the ROOT button to select a root.

The ROOT function is highlighted, and the root changes.

If you hold the ROOT button down, the INVERT setting may also change.

When the ROOT function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to select a root.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

7 3

76 CVP-109/107/105/700

When the TYPE function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to select a chord type.

The following chord types can be specified in the display:

Major [Maj] Minor [m] Seventh [7] Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)] Sixth [6] Minor sixth [m6] Major seventh [M7] Suspended fourth [sus4]

Augmented [aug] Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)] Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] Seventh augmented [7 (#5)] Diminished seventh [dim7] Flatted fifth [(b5)] Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)] Minor major seventh [mM7]

B Rotate the fingering as desired.

Press INVERT to shift the fingering down the keyboard. Each time the INVERT button is pressed, the next viable fingering for the chord appears. The INVERT function displays the inversion number.

N Enter the chord.

TYPE function Settings: See list at left.Use the TYPE and buttons to select a chord type.

The TYPE function is highlighted, and the type changes.

V Enter the chord type.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

7 4

Any chords recognized in Fingered 1 mode can be entered from the key- board.

The Clavinova displays the name of the chord recognized from the key- board at the left edge of the LCD dis- play, under the measure number. You can compare this chord root and type displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions to make sure youre fingering the chord correctly. When the root of the chord being played corresponds to one of the black keys on the keyboard, the root may be displayed as either flat or sharp; for example, Bb may also be displayed as A# (see the sidebar on page 72 for details).

A flashing keyboard guide lamp indi- cates a note which may be omitted.

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the fingering for the selected chord, and the musical notation for the chord is displayed in the center of the LCD display. At this point you can either play the chord on the keyboard or press the ENTER button to hear the accompani- ment play it.

M Stop the Auto Accompaniment.

When youre done with Chord Assistance, press [START/STOP] or [ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.

< Turn Chord Assistance off.

To turn Chord Assistance off, press [EXIT] or [ACMP ON].

The main display appears. If you press [ACMP ON], the Auto Ac- companiment is turned off at the same time.

77CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has five accompaniment parts: Rhythm, Bass, Chord, Pad, and Phrase.

Adjusting Individual Part Levels

The overall accompaniment playback volume can be adjusted using the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider.

By adjusting the volume balance of the various parts, or setting the volume of some parts to 0, you can create varia- tions on the basic style accompani- ment.

Some styles may not use all five ac- companiment parts.

You can also adjust the level of reverb that is applied to the Auto Accompani- ment parts. See page 50 for details.

The volume settings for the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted individually in the MIXER display page.

Part volume relationships The volume level of each Auto Accom-

paniment part is relative to the [ACMP/ SONG VOLUME] setting.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] setting is relative to the [MASTER VOLUME] setting.

Z Press the [MIXER] button. .......................................................................

The lamp lights, and the MIXER page appears.

X Select a part. ..........................................................................................................

Press the LCD button for the part whose level you want to set.

RHYTHM This part forms the basis of the accompaniment. The Rhythm part usually plays one of the drum kits.

BASS The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including acoustic bass and synth bass.

CHORD The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accompa- niment for each style. Youll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sus- tained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir.

PHRASE The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting.

SONG MIXER FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZER

The selected function is highlighted.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

7 5

78 CVP-109/107/105/700

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

C Set the volume level......................................................................................

Part volume levels Range: 0 (min.) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 110

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume level. You can also increase the level by holding down the button you used to select the part.

You can set the volume of the highlighted part to 0 by pressing and quickly releasing its button. Press and release the button a second time to restore the previous value.

To reset the highlighted parts volume to the basic setting of 110, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

V Repeat steps Xand C. ..............................................................................

Repeat the preceding steps to set the level for other parts. (You can also select several parts and adjust their volume settings simultaneously.)

B Exit the MIXER display. ..............................................................................

To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again, or press [EXIT].

The lamp turns off, and the main display appears.

SONG MIXER FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZER EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

7 6

79CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has many other features and functions that make the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and enjoyable. With these functions you can easily select panel settings to suit a certain type of music, have the Clavinova play harmony to your melody line, or program Auto Accompaniment changes in advance so you can concentrate on playing the keyboard.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

The Clavinovas built-in Music Database gives you a convenient way to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type of music. Just select one of the more than 400 panel setups in the Music Database; the Clavinova does the rest!

For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 13 of the Reference Booklet.

Z Display the Music Database. ................................................................

Music Database

When you display the Music Database, the Clavinova automatically recalls a panel setup that uses the current style. (The name of this setup is highlighted in the Music Database menu.) If you want to use the selected setup, you can simply skip to step 4 of this proce- dure.

The Automatic Accompaniment also turns on when you display the Music Database. If you access the Music Database before starting the style, the Synchronized Start function (page 65) is also turned on.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

The lamp lights, and the MUSIC DATABASE menu appears.

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY MUSIC DATABASE

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY MUSIC DATABASE

Highlighted setup

The MUSIC DATABASE menu display contains a listing of panel setups that can be sorted either by style or alphabetically. The name of the style that is used by the currently highlighted setup is shown at the upper right edge of the display.

Style name

7 7

Panel Setups CVP-109: 564 CVP-107/700: 534 CVP-105: 498

80 CVP-109/107/105/700

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

X Sort the list, if necessary. ........................................................................

To display the panel setups for a specific style group, simply press the correspond- ing STYLE button. The menu is automati- cally sorted by style, and a panel setup that uses the currently selected style in the chosen group is highlighted.

Press the SORT button to switch the highlighted setting between STYLE and AZ.

C Select and recall a panel setup.........................................................

The Harmony function will not be turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected, even if the selected Music Database setup includes Harmony On.

Press one of the left or right LCD buttons to highlight the desired panel setup in the Music Database list.

The panel setup is highlighted.

You can also use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the highlighted panel setup. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display a different page of the Music Database.

Press the SET button to recall the highlighted setup.

The style, voice, and effect settings change automatically.

Once you have selected a panel setup from the Music Database, you can change the style, voice and effect settings to suit your preferences. You can also use the Registration function (page 108) to save the panel setup in the Clavinovas memory.

V Return to the main display. ....................................................................

Press [EXIT] to exit the Music Database menu display.

The previous display appears. (The selected Music Database setup is indicated below the style name in the main display.)

When STYLE is highlighted, the menu list is sorted by style, and a panel setup that uses the currently selected style is highlighted.

When AZ is highlighted, the menu is sorted alphabetically.

7 8

81CVP-109/107/105/700

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

At times you may find it difficult to control the Auto Accompaniment while playing a complicated piece of music that requires your full atten- tion on the keyboard. The Accompaniment Assistance function lets you program chord and pattern changes in advance, so that the Auto Accom- paniment will play itself, letting you concentrate on playing the keyboard parts.

Setting Up the Accompaniment Assistance ..................

Use the following procedure to create Accompaniment Assistance data before you begin your performance:

Z Open the ACMP ASSIST display.

Accompaniment Assistance

If the Clavinovas memory contains Accompaniment Assistance data, it will be displayed in the ACMP ASSIST display.

The [ACMP ON] lamp will not light when you load Accompaniment Assist- ance data that includes an accompa- niment off event (page 84). If you wish to add chords to the loaded data, you must first change this to an accompa- niment on event. To do so, move the cursor to the top of the first measure as described in step 2 (page 82), press [ACMP ON] to light the lamp, then press SET. (See the sidebar on page 86 for details regarding the use of accompaniment off events in Accom- paniment Assistance playback.)

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ASSIST].

B Turn off the Music Database. ...............................................................

When youre done using the Music Database setup, press the [MU- SIC DATABASE] button again.

The [MUSIC DATABASE] lamp turns off, and the panel settings you were using before you accessed the Music Database are re- stored.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

The [ACMP ASSIST] and [ACMP ON] lamps light, and the page 1 of the ACMP ASSIST display appears.

7 9

82 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Enter a chord, if desired. If Full Keyboard was last selected as

the accompaniment mode (page 73), Fingered 1 is automatically selected when you open the ACMP ASSIST display. To indicate chords by a differ- ent method, move the cursor to the top of the first measure, then open the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display and select an accompaniment mode (other than Full Keyboard) as de- scribed on page 71. (You can also set a different split point in this display.) The Clavinova will return to the ACMP ASSIST display when you press the [EXIT] button.

The chord input resolution will be automatically selected according to the current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord can be entered on every 8th note or 8th-note triplet. For other time signa- tures, one chord can be entered for each measure.

To enter a chord, play the chord with appropriate fingering in the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point).

The name of the chord you play appears in the box below the measure bars, as well as in the ROOT and TYPE functions.

You can also select the ROOT and TYPE buttons, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to manually set the chord root and type.

V Enter a style change, if desired. Intro patterns can only be entered at

the beginning of a song. Style changes, variation changes, and

ending patterns can only be entered at the beginning of a measure.

Fill-in patterns can be entered any- where in the measure. (The break fill pattern triggered by the left pedal (page 190) cannot be entered using the Accompaniment Assistance func- tion, however.)

A fade-out cannot be entered during a fade-in.

You can also use an original style created using the Custom Style func- tion (page 91). Only one custom style can be included in a given set of Ac- companiment Assistance data.

To add a fill-in pattern at any point in a measure, press the button cor- responding to the desired fill-in pattern as usual (see page 63).

To change the style variation at the start of a measure without playing a fill-in pattern, press the button twice.

To change the style at the start of a measure, simply select a new style in the usual manner (see page 61).

X Move the cursor to the entry point. When you first open the ACMP AS-

SIST display, the current AUTO AC- COMPANIMENT panel settings are entered at the top of the first measure. This data is represented as a thick line segment with no chord (i.e., a series of dashes).

You may want to change the data in the initial segment, setting a chord and perhaps adding an intro pattern or fade-in (page 66), before you move the cursor to another entry point.

The display shows each measure as a horizontal line with 8th-note divisions. The number of each measure is shown to the left of the line. Previously entered data is indicated by a thick line segment.

Use the CURSOR < and > buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to move the triangular cursor to the point at which you want to enter a chord or style change.

Measure number Eighth note divisions

Previously entered data

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 0

Chord type

Chord root

Chord

83CVP-109/107/105/700

Style name

End mark

The names of the selected style and variation (or fill-in pattern) are shown at the top the display.

B Set the entered data.

When you have entered chord and style control data, press the SET button.

A thick line segment appears at the cursor position to indicate that the data has been recorded, and the cursor automatically moves to the next position.

If you have programmed a chord change, the chord name may also be displayed above the segment in ques- tion.

The chord name is indicated only at the first beat of the measure line, except when a style uses the 4/4 time signature, in which case the chord name is indicated at the first and third beats.

A chord change event will not be en- tered if the chord is the same as that which was last entered.

N Repeat until the data is complete. You can program up to 999 measures of data using the Accompaniment Assist- ance function.

Repeat steps 2 through 5 until your Accompaniment Assistance data is complete. You can press the [PLAY/STOP] button at any time to play back the data and check your settings.

M Set the end mark . An end mark is unnecessary when an

ending pattern or fade-out event has been programmed.

See page 85 for more information about the end mark.

When you have completed your Accompaniment Assistance data, press the PAGE [>] button to select page 2 of the ACMP ASSIST display, then press the END MARK button to enter an end mark that identifies the end of the data.

The end mark symbol is displayed in the box in the middle of the display.

Press the SET button to set the end mark.

< Exit the ACMP ASSIST display. You can always modify the Accompani- ment Assistance data later by reopening the ACMP ASSIST display and making the desired changes.

Press [ACMP ASSIST] or [EXIT] to return to the main display.

The [ACMP ASSIST] lamp turns off, and the main display appears.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

Variation or pattern

8 1

84 CVP-109/107/105/700

Advanced Accompaniment Assistance ...................................

Here are some other things you can do with Accompaniment Assist- ance data.

Changing Part Volumes You can program volume changes for the Auto Accompaniment parts.

Used judiciously, these can help you create professional-sounding dy- namic changes in your performance. To do this, press the [MIXER] but- ton and change the part volume settings as desired, then press [EXIT] to return to the ACMP ASSIST display. The volume event symbol (which looks like a speaker) should now appear in the box in the middle of the display. Press the SET button to set the volume change as entered.

An initial volume event is automatically entered at the top of the first measure, based on the current part volume settings when the ACMP ASSIST display is first opened.

Changing the Tempo You can also program tempo changes in the middle of a performance.

Simply position the cursor at the point where you want the tempo to change, then use the TEMPO [] and [+] buttons to select the new tempo. The new tempo is displayed in the box in the middle of the ACMP ASSIST display. Press the SET button to set the tempo change as entered.

An initial tempo event is automatically entered at the top of the first measure, based on the current tempo settings when the ACMP ASSIST display is first opened.

Entering a Rhythm Break You can have Accompaniment Assistance play the rhythm part alone

(without other accompaniment) as a transitional rhythm break. To do this, you must record a no chord event at the beginning of the break. Press any three adjacent keys (two white keys and a black key, or vice versa) in the left range of the keyboard when using the Fingered 1 or Fingered 2 mode, or select TYPE and use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to display a series of dashes (- - -) as the setting for that function. Then press the SET button to register the break.

Entering an Accompaniment Break A complete break can be useful if you want to play the keyboard part

solo. To create an accompaniment break, set a no chord event as de- scribed above, and turn the rhythm off as described on the next page.

Entering an Accompaniment Off Event When you first open the ACMP ASSIST display to create new Ac-

companiment Assistance data, an accompaniment on event is regis- tered at the top of the first measure. You can enter an accompaniment off event by moving the cursor to the top of the first measure, pressing the [ACMP ON] button so the lamp turns off, and pressing the SET but- ton. See the sidebar on page 86 for details regarding the use of accom- paniment off events in Accompaniment Assistance playback.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 2

85CVP-109/107/105/700

Other Accompaniment Assistance Functions..................

Page 2 of the ACMP ASSIST display contains some useful functions that help you to enter Accompaniment Assistance data more efficiently.

ALL DELETE function To delete all of the Accompaniment Assistance data and start from

scratch, press the ALL DELETE button. An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to delete the data, or NO to cancel.

DELETE function To delete the Accompaniment Assistance data at the current cursor

location, press the DELETE button. An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel.

END MARK function This function is used to enter an end mark that identifies the end of

the Accompaniment Assistance data (see page 83). An end mark should generally be entered to properly end the data. The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end mark with the DELETE function, just as with other data.

An end mark is unnecessary when an ending pattern or fade-out event has been programmed.

If the Accompaniment Assistance data is not ended by an end mark, an end- ing pattern, or a fade-out event, play- back will end one measure after the last entered data.

RHYTHM ON/OFF function To turn the rhythm part on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF but-

ton followed by the SET button. No rhythm sounds are produced following the location at which a

rhythm off event has been entered; the rhythm starts sounding again from the location to which a rhythm on event is entered.

The status of the rhythm part is indicated by the drum symbol in the box in the middle of the display.

An initial rhythm on event is automati- cally entered at the top of the first meas- ure.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 3

Playing with Accompaniment Assistance .............................

Use the following procedure to play back your Accompaniment As- sistance data:

Z Turn on Accompaniment Assistance.

Press the [ACMP ASSIST] button.

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY MUSIC DATABASE

The [ACMP ASSIST] lamp lights.

This mark indicates that the rhythm part is playing.

86 CVP-109/107/105/700

Other Ways to Use Accompaniment Assistance............

Playing the Chords Yourself Since the Clavinova will respond to the chords you indicate in the left

range of the keyboard when the [ACMP ON] lamp is lit, you can manu- ally change chords even if the Accompaniment Assistance data already includes chord changes. The Auto Accompaniment will always play the most recently detected chord, regardless of whether that chord was indi- cated by the Accompaniment Assistance data or the keyboard.

If you want to play all the chord changes (while the Accompaniment Assistance function controls the style changes for you), simply dont include any chord changes in the Accompaniment Assistance data.

If you have already included chords in your Accompaniment Assistance data, but later decide that you want to play the chords yourself, you dont have to go to the trouble of erasing them. You can achieve the same result by adding an accompaniment off event at the top of the first measure (see page 84), then starting the Auto Accompaniment as described in Playing with Accompani- ment Assistance, above.

Using the Entire Keyboard To play a keyboard part using the entire range of the keyboard, just omit

step 2 of the procedure above. (You will also have to press [SYNCHRO] before you start playing if you want to use the Synchronized Start func- tion.) You wont be able to indicate chords manually, but the Auto Accom- paniment will still play according to the Accompaniment Assistance data.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

X Turn on the Auto Accompaniment.

Press the [ACMP ON] button.

The [ACMP ON] lamp lights, and the current accompaniment mode is indicated at the left edge of the main display.

The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 65). Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.

8 4

C Start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button, or start playing the keyboard.

The Auto Accompaniment starts playing automatically, including any section changes and chord changes indicated by the previ- ously recorded Accompaniment Assistance data.

Play the keyboard part in the right-hand range of the keyboard, along with the Auto Accompaniment. (The left-hand range can be used to indicate chords, as described below in Playing the Chords Yourself.)

Playing the Style Without Auto Accompaniment By combining the two techniques described above, you can have the

Accompaniment Assistance control only the style changes played by the rhythm section without using the other accompaniment parts, to provide an automatic percussion-only accompaniment. Just dont include any chord changes in the Accompaniment Assistance data, and leave the [ACMP ON] button off when you start playing. You will be able to play along to a simple percussion accompaniment, using the entire range of the keyboard.

As was mentioned above, if you have already programmed chords in your Accompaniment Assistance data, you can achieve the same result by adding an accompaniment off event at the top of the first measure (see page 84).

Saving and Loading Your Data ...........................................................

Since the Clavinovas memory can only hold one set (up to 999 measures) of Accompaniment Assistance data at a time, you may want to save your data on a disk so that you can load it again after programming other sets.

You can save and load Accompaniment Assistance data using the func- tions in the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display (see page 192).

You can play back song data and Ac- companiment Assistance data at the same time. However, you will not be able to use the [REW] or [FF] buttons, or any of the Repeat (page 122) and Guide Control (page 125) functions that are normally available during song playback. Moreover, the style changes and time signature information in the Accompani- ment Assistance data will take priority over those in the song; any rhythm, bass, and chord parts recorded in the song will therefore not play back. The playback tempo will be determined by tempo data in the song, however.

You can also record the Accompaniment Assistance data to a floppy disk using the Song Record function.

87CVP-109/107/105/700

Harmony

This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you play using the main voice in the right range of the keyboard. The har- mony notes are produced automatically to match chords played with Auto Accompaniment.

Adding Harmony .................................................................................................

Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing, you can add spice and professional polish to your performance by ap- plying harmony to selected phrases as you play.

Z Turn the Harmony function on.

The Harmony feature cannot be turned on when Full Keyboard is selected as the accompaniment mode (page 71).

The Harmony feature can be used while playing back the intro or ending, or while the Auto Accompaniment is off, if one of the following harmony types (page 88) is selected: Octave, 1+5, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill.Press the [HARMONY] button.

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY MUSIC DATABASE

The lamp lights.

X Play the keyboard.

Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment.

With some Harmony types the voice used for the Harmony will be different from the currently selected main voice.

When chords are played in the right- hand section of the keyboard, the harmony will be applied to the last note played.

C Turn the Harmony function off. Using the Pedals If you set the LEFT PEDAL function to

HARMONY (page 190), the Clavinova will play harmony only while the left pedal is pressed.

If you use the left pedal to control the harmony, that pedal will have no effect when the Harmony function is off (i.e., when the [HARMONY] lamp is not lit).

Press the [HARMONY] button again.

The lamp turns off.

Displaying the Harmony Settings ....................................................

You can change the harmony type, the volume of the harmony voice, and other harmony settings in the HARMONY display page.

To display the HARMONY page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [HARMONY].

The HARMONY display appears.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 5

88 CVP-109/107/105/700

Selecting a Harmony Type ........................................................................

You can change the type of harmony that is played using the HAR- MONY TYPE function in the HARMONY display.

HARMONY TYPE function Settings: See table on this page. Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Z Select the HARMONY TYPE function.

If necessary, press one of the LCD buttons under the HARMONY TYPE function.

The HARMONY TYPE function is highlighted.

X Select a harmony type.

Use the left and right LCD buttons to select a harmony type. If neces- sary, use the PAGE [<] or [>] buttons to display additional harmony types.

The selected harmony type is highlighted.

You can also change the harmony type with the HARMONY TYPE and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons. To restore the basic setting for the currently selected main voice, press the HAR- MONY TYPE and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons simultane- ously.

Since the basic setting of the HARMONY TYPE function depends on the currently selected main voice, a different harmony type may be selected automatically if you change the main voice selection.

On the CVP-109/107/700, effects applied to the main voice will also be applied to the harmony part when certain harmony types (indicated by a in the Effect column of the table at left) are selected.

Some harmony types (indicated by a in the Speed column of the table at left) have a speed setting that can be adjusted. See the next topic for details.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 6

Type Effect Speed

Duet

Trio

Block

4 Part

Country

Octave

1+5

Echo

Tremolo

Trill

Strumming

Add Jazz Gtr

Add Brass

Add Strings

In The Forest

Harmony Types

89CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Harmony Speed.............................................................

You can change the speed of the harmony notes played by the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill harmony types using the SPEED function in the HARMONY display.

SPEED function Settings: 4, 6, 8, 12 (Echo)

8, 12, 16, 32 (Tremolo) 12, 16, 24, 32 (Trill)

Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Z Select the SPEED function.

Press the LCD button under the SPEED function.

The SPEED function is highlighted.

X Change the SPEED setting.

Use the SPEED button, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of the SPEED function.

Changing the Harmony Volume .........................................................

You can change the volume of the harmony notes using the VOL- UME function in the HARMONY display.

VOLUME function Settings: 0 (min.) 127 (max.) Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Z Select the VOLUME function.

Press the one of the LCD buttons under the VOLUME function.

The VOLUME function is highlighted.

X Change the VOLUME setting.

Use the VOLUME and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of the VOLUME function. To restore the VOLUME function to its basic setting for the currently selected main voice, press the VOLUME and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

8 7

90 CVP-109/107/105/700

One Touch Setting

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

The Clavinovas convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style youre playing. Each style has four preprogrammed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.

For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 13 of the Reference Booklet.

The One Touch Setting function cannot be used with styles in the [DISK/CUS- TOM] group.

Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................

Select the desired style in the normal way (see page 61).

X Make sure the ONE TOUCH SETTING function is on. If necessary, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button.

The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button lamp lights.

C Select a panel setup......................................................................................

When you select a panel setup, the Auto Accompaniment turns on auto- matically. If you select a panel setup before starting the style, the Synchro- nized Start function (page 65) will also turn on.

The Harmony function will not be turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected, even if the selected One Touch Setting setup includes Har- mony On.

Press one of the four numbered buttons under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING.

The voice and effect settings change automatically, and the se- lected OTS setup is indicated in the main display, below and to the right of the style name.

Once you have selected a panel setup using the One Touch Setting function, you can change the voice and effect settings to suit your prefer- ences. You can also use the Registration function (page 108) to save the panel setup in the Clavinovas memory.

8 8

91CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova lets you create custom accompaniment styles that you can recall and play back at any time, just like the presets. Up to 12 custom styles can be maintained in the Clavinovas memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk for later reloading and use.

Creating Your Own Styles

Recording a Custom Style

Use the following procedure to record your own custom styles.

Z Select the DISK/CUSTOM style group.......................................

One temporary style (named TEMP.STYLE) is automatically loaded into the DISK/CUSTOM style memory when the power is turned on.

If you have loaded other style data (see page 106), you can select any of the styles from the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE menu to serve as the basis for your new custom style.

Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.

The lamp lights, and the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display appears.

X Select the CUSTOM STYLE function. ............................................

Press the CUSTOM STYLE button.

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

8 9

92 CVP-109/107/105/700

Creating Your Own Styles

C Select a source style. ...................................................................................

Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 61).

You can also use the style already selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display as the basis for your new style, or select a different DISK/CUSTOM style just as you would a preset style.

V Select the section you want to record. .....................................

In the CUSTOM STYLE display, the variations and patterns that make up a style are referred to as sections.

A custom style includes only one intro section, one fill-in section, and one ending section.

The custom styles intro, fill-in, and ending sections are based on the corresponding patterns for the style variation (MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, or MAIN D) that was selected when the CUSTOM STYLE button was pressed (page 91).

In page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, press the SECTION but- ton as many times as necessary to display the section you want to record: MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, MAIN D, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING.

The SECTION function is highlighted, and each section is displayed in turn. The Clavinova plays the currently displayed section repeat- edly.

Current recording sec- tion and part

The Select a source style message is displayed for a few seconds, then replaced by page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. The style that was selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display begins playing.

9 0

93CVP-109/107/105/700

B Change the beat and section length. ..........................................

If you want to create a style with a different time signature than the selected style, or change the number of measures in the selected section, press the PAGE [>] button.

Page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display appears.

Beat of selected style Current measure number of selected section

Total measure number of selected section

BEAT function Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5 Basic setting: Depends on style.

Press the BEAT button to select a different time signature.

The Clear style? message is displayed.

Clear style? Since the patterns of the selected style will not match the new beat, you will have to completely clear the style and start recording from scratch if you change the time signature.

Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style has been cleared, you can use the BEAT button, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to select a new time signature.

Creating Your Own Styles

Changing the beat:

9 1

94 CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the section length: MEASURE function Settings: 1 8 Basic setting: Depends on style.

Clear section? You will have to clear all parts of the

currently selected section and start recording from scratch if you change the number of measures.

The Clear section? message will not be displayed if you have already cleared the section by changing the beat, as described above.

Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style has been cleared, you can use the MEASURE button, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to set the section length.

When youre done here:

Once the BEAT and/or MEASURE parameters have been set as re- quired, press the PAGE [<] button to return to page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.

N Select the part you want to record................................................

Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [] and [+] buttons to select the part you want to record.

The R1 part is initially selected and set to record.

Any part you select can be set to record by using the rightmost LCD button to select RECORD after selecting the part.

R1 Rhythm 1 R2 Rhythm 2 Bs Bass C1 Chord 1 C2 Chord 2 Pd Pad P1 Phrase 1 P2 Phrase 2

Recording part

Only one part can be set to record. All other parts will be set to PLAY (the

part number is surrounded by a box) or OFF (only the part number is dis- played).

Part containing no dataPlayback part

OFF

Creating Your Own Styles

Press the MEASURE button to change the number of measures in the current section.

The Clear section? message is displayed.

9 2

The length of the FILL IN section can only be set to one measure.

95CVP-109/107/105/700

The part number is highlighted. If you have selected a part other than R1 or R2, the Clear part? message will be displayed. Clear part?

If the source style is a preset style or a style loaded from an optional Style File disk, parts other than R1 and R2 must be cleared before they can be re- corded.

The Clear part? message will not be displayed if the selected part does not contain any data.

Press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort.

M Select the voice for the part. .........................................................

The preset voice for the part being re- corded is initially selected.

At this point you can also select the voice you want to record the part with. Select the voice as you would the main keyboard voice (see page 31).

Part Voices that can be used

R1 Any drum or SFX kit in PERCUSSION group

R2 Any except Organ Flute (CVP-109/107/700)

Others Any except a drum kit, SFX kit, or Organ Flute (CVP-109/107/700)

< Record the selected part...................................................................

Playback of the custom style can be started and stopped by pressing the [START/STOP] button. (Data cannot be recorded while playback is stopped.)

All notes are automatically stopped at the end of the style (i.e., at the point between repeats when recording). It is therefore not advisable to record over this point.

You can now record new notes in the selected part by playing the keyboard at the appropriate timing. Record non-percussion parts in C major seventh (CM7), since the custom style is recorded as a C ma- jor seventh pattern.

If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide. (The metronome sound is not re- corded, and will stop as soon as the custom style is stored.)

Creating Your Own Styles

9 3

96 CVP-109/107/105/700

When recording a drum kit voice in part R1 or R2, you can clear a single drum instrument from the part by pressing the key corresponding to the instrument to be cleared while holding down the C1 key on the keyboard. (The C1 key is labeled CANCEL.) The metronome timing guide can also be cleared in this way.

> Quantize the recorded part, if necessary. ..............................

You can tighten up the timing of a recorded part by using the PART QUANTIZE functions in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to align all the notes to a specified beat. Press the PAGE [>] button to dis- play the function, then press the middle LCD button to select the quantize size:

Once the required quantize size has been selected, press the START LCD button to quantize the current part. The part will begin to play using the new timing, and the START button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once another button has been pressed.

Creating Your Own Styles

Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear all parts in the selected section.

3

3

3

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

9 4

97CVP-109/107/105/700

? Repeat until the custom style is complete. ..........................

During custom style recording, no MIXER display is available.

Repeat steps 4 through 9 to record other parts for the currently se- lected section.

Repeat steps 4 through 10 to record other sections, until all sections have been recorded.

[ Name the custom style. .............................................................................

When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the STYLE NAME LCD button to display the NAME page.

Use the CHAR > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the character you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [] and [+] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the CHAR SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The BACK SPACE LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete the preceding character.

When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.

Creating Your Own Styles

9 5

98 CVP-109/107/105/700

Store the custom style. ..............................................................................

The current tempo setting at the time the custom style is stored becomes the preset tempo for that style.

Press the STORE LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to store the current custom style in the Clavinovas memory.

The Clavinova displays a message asking you to confirm your decision to store the style.

Use the MEMORY NO. and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to select the memory number (1 through 12) where you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or CANCEL to abort.

If the selected memory number already contains a style, the style name will appear next to the memory number. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is stored.

Exit when done. ..................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the CUSTOM STYLE display and return to the main display.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

Creating Your Own Styles

9 6

Be Sure to Save Your Data! Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned

off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off (see page 101).

99CVP-109/107/105/700

In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages include several other functions that you may find useful when creating custom styles.

RECALL SECTION function .....................................................................

This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. If the Clavinova cannot recall the preceding operation (i.e., after time signature has been changed), the Cant recall! mes- sage will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to the previous display.

Other Custom Style Functions

STYLE CLEAR function.................................................................................

Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to completely clear the current custom style. The Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press YES to clear the style, or NO to cancel the change.

Creating Your Own Styles

9 7

100 CVP-109/107/105/700

Volume and Effects.........................................................................................

Page 4 of the CUSTOM STYLE display includes several functions that let you set the volume, reverb, chorus type and depth, effect (CVP- 109/107/700), and pan for each part of each custom style section.

Z Select the section and part.

Use the SECTION function to select a section (or select ALL for all sections), and the PART function to select a part (or select ALL for all parts).

X Select the parameter you want to set.

The third LCD button selects the parameter to be set for the current section and part. Choose from VOLUME, REVERB, CHORUS, EF- FECT (CVP-109/107/700) or PAN.

C Select the chorus type.

If you selected CHORUS in step 2, the TYPE function is displayed above the fourth LCD button. Use this function to select the chorus type you want to apply to the current section and part.

Creating Your Own Styles

Chorus Type List CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 CHORUS 3

CELESTE 1 CELESTE 2 CELESTE 3

FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 OFF

CVP-109/107/700

9 8

CVP-105

CVP-109/107/700

CVP-109/107/700

The word OTHERS may appear as the chorus type if the preset style uses a chorus type other than those in the list. The OTHERS setting cannot be re-se- lected once you select a different chorus type.

101CVP-109/107/105/700

V Set the value or depth of the selected parameter. The reverb and effect types used for

the custom style are determined by the style that was selected as the basis for custom style creation.

Normally the VALUE and chorus TYPE settings from the preset style are ini- tially selected. If the PART function is set to ALL, the preset values for part R1 are displayed. If the SECTION function is set to ALL, the preset val- ues for MAIN A are displayed.

The VALUE (or DEPTH) function displayed above the rightmost LCD button sets the amount or depth for the parameter selected in step 2. When VOLUME is selected, the SECTION setting is fixed at ALL and the VALUE range is from 50 to +50 (this value is relative to the preset volume of the source style). When the REVERB, CHORUS, or EFFECT (CVP-109/107/700) parameter is selected, the DEPTH can be set in a range from 0 to 127. When PAN is selected, the VALUE function can be set in a range from L10 (full left) to C (center) to R10 (full right).

B Repeat as necessary.

Repeat the preceding steps to set other parameters for each part and section in the custom style.

Saving Styles to Disk ...................................................................................

Page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display lets you save custom styles on a disk. You can save custom styles individually, or in a complete set of up to 12 styles.

After inserting a properly formatted disk (page 131) in the Clavinovas disk drive, use the MEMORY NO. and buttons to select the custom style you want to save to disk, or select ALL to save a complete set of up to 12 custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to start saving the data to disk. At this point the SAVE display appears.

Enter a name for the style file. The procedure for entering the filename is the same as that used to enter a name for a custom style (page 112). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the same name already exists, the Same name! Overwrite? mes- sage will be displayed. Press OK to overwrite the existing file, or CAN- CEL to abort the save operation.

Creating Your Own Styles

9 9

102 CVP-109/107/105/700

Custom styles must be stored in the Clavinovas memory before they can be saved to a disk. If a custom style has not been stored and you at- tempt to save it to disk, the Store in memory before saving to disk message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. Store the custom style (see step 12 on page 98), then try saving again.

Deleting Style Files .........................................................................................

Style files can also be deleted from a disk using the DELETE func- tion on page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.

After inserting a disk that contains style files in the Clavinova disk drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use the FILE and buttons to select the style file you want to delete from the disk. The Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the style file, or NO to cancel.

Exiting Custom Style Mode ...................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode and return to the main display.

Style files can be loaded from disk using the ALL LOAD and SINGLE LOAD func- tions, as described in the Loading Style Files section (page 105).

Creating Your Own Styles

1 0

0

103CVP-109/107/105/700

Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for play- back by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE and LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to select the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 61).

Playing Back Your Custom Styles

Since only one intro pattern, one fill-in pattern, and one ending pattern can be recorded for each custom style, no intro, fill-in, or ending variations are produced during playback.

The following messages may appear when creating and storing a style in Custom Style mode.

Memory Full During Recording .........................................................

This message will be displayed if the memory becomes full during recording or editing.

Messages in Custom Style Mode

Press OK to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display, then simplify the style by clearing a part, etc.

Insufficient Memory To Store ..............................................................

This message will be displayed if there is not enough memory to per- form a store operation.

In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you dont need, or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to re- turn to the CUSTOM STYLE display and simplify the current style (by clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to delete one or more styles.

Creating Your Own Styles

1 0

1

104 CVP-109/107/105/700

Creating Your Own Styles

If you select the DELETE function, the Select style to delete message will be displayed: The amount of memory being used by

each style is displayed next to the style name (in approximate kilobytes). You can refer to this amount to judge how much memory (out of the total 300 KB) will become available when a particular style is deleted.

Use the MEMORY NO. and buttons to select the style you want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to cancel the operation.

If the Clavinova displays the Cant delete this style! mes- sage when you try to delete a style, it is because you have tried to delete the style that your custom style was based on. If this happens, press OK to return to the Select style to delete display, then select a dif- ferent style to delete.

Exit Before Store ...............................................................................................

If you press [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode before storing the style, the Clavinova will display a message like the one shown below:

Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and exit, press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

Style Change Before Store..................................................................... If you want to select a different source style without storing the current style, exit the Custom Style mode without storing the style (see Exit Before Store above), then re-enter the Custom Style mode.

If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the style youve just edited, the following display will appear:

Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and select a new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

1 0

2

105CVP-109/107/105/700

You can load and play style files created in the Style File Format either from optional Yamaha Style File disks, or from disks containing custom style files youve created yourself.

Using Style Files

The Style File Format is Yamahas original auto-accompaniment for- mat, which has evolved through years of development and refinement. The Style File Format features a unique conversion system that allows you to play exceptionally high-quality accompaniments with a variety of chord types. In addition to the internal styles, the Style File Format lets you use other sophisticated styles from optional Style File disks, as well as styles that were created and saved to disk in the Custom Style mode.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

DISK

CUSTOM

About the Yamaha Style File Format

Style files created for Clavinova models prior to the CVP-109/107/105/700 may have slightly different formats. If you try loading such files, the data may not play back as expected. (This also applies to the use of CVP-109/107/105/700 style data by earlier-model Clavinovas.)

Loading Styles from a Disk

Z Insert a disk. ...........................................................................................................

If a disk containing both song data and style files is inserted, the SONG PLAY display will automatically appear. If this happens, press the [SONG] button or the [EXIT] button to return to the main dis- play, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.

Insert a disk containing style files into the disk drive. The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. When a Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display (see step 2 below) will appear automatically.

If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button to open the DISK/ CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the LOAD SINGLE button.

DISK IN USE

1 0

3

106 CVP-109/107/105/700

To load a set of 12 style files that was created by selecting ALL as the memory number when the files were saved in Custom Style mode (see page 101), press the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD SINGLE button.

X Select a style file. ..............................................................................................

If a tempo is set prior to loading the style, that tempo becomes the default for the loaded style.

Some styles are too large to preview with the LISTEN function. In this case the Too much data for LISTEN func- tion! Please load data. message will be displayed. If this happens, load the style directly as in step 4.

The Auto Accompaniment is automati- cally turned on when the LOAD SIN- GLE button is pressed, and the style is played back automatically with the Auto Accompaniment in C Major when the LISTEN LCD button is pressed. You can change the chord or try play- ing on the keyboard while previewing a style.

Select the desired style using the left and right LCD buttons, the STYLE and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons.

You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD button. (The LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD dis- play.) To stop listening, press the LISTEN LCD button again, or press the [START/STOP] button.

If the selected memory number already contains a style, the name of that style will appear above the MEMORY and LOAD functions in the display. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is loaded. (One pre-pro- grammed temporary style is automati- cally loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on.)

Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 12), then press the LOAD LCD button to load the style file.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select and load other style files.

Using Style Files

C Select a memory number and load the style. ....................

1 0

4

107CVP-109/107/105/700

It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.

If there is not enough memory to load the specified style file, the Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded style? mes- sage will be displayed. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style you dont need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY NO. and buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.

Playing Loaded Style Files

Using Style Files

V Eject the disk when youre done. ....................................................

STYLE

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

COUNTRY DISK

CUSTOM

The ALL LOAD display is as follows:

CAUTION

The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light while the style is being loaded. NEVER attempt to remove a disk while the [DISK IN USE] lamp is lit.

The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT], and STYLE buttons will not function while the style data is being loaded (i.e., while the [DISK IN USE] lamp is lit).

When youve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display. You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by pressing the [EXIT] button.

Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory only until the power is turned off.

Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the right and left LCD buttons, the STYLE and LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to select the style you want to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 61).

1 0

5

When ALL LOAD is executed, all data in the 12 memories will be replaced by new data.

The amount of memory being used by each style is displayed next to the style name (in approximate kilobytes). You can refer to this amount to judge how much memory (out of the total 300 KB) will become available when a particular style is deleted.

108 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Registration feature lets you store complete panel setups that you can recall whenever needed. A total of 20 setups (5 banks containing 4 memories each) can be registered in the Clavinovas memory.

CHAPTER 6: Registrations Using Registrations (Registering and Recalling Panel Setups)

Use the following procedure to store a panel setup as a registration in the Clavinovas memory.

Z Set up the controls as needed............................................................

For a list of the settings that are memorized by the Registration func- tion, refer to page 13 of the Reference Booklet.

Storing a Panel Setup

Registration bank Range: A E Basic setting: A

Use the BANK [+] and [] buttons to select the desired bank.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

The selected bank is displayed below and to the right of the style name in the main display.

X Select a registration bank. .......................................................................

1 0

6

Registration bank

109CVP-109/107/105/700

C Register the panel setup. ..........................................................................

Using Registrations

Registration Memory Range: 1 4 (each bank) Basic setting: None

While holding down the [REGISTRATION] button, press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration memory where you want to save the setup.

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

The number and name of the selected registration memory appear below and to the right of the style name in the main display. The panel settings that were previously stored in the selected registra- tion are cleared and replaced by the new settings.

Pre-programmed settings are initially stored in all registration memories when the Clavinovas power is first turned on.

By default, the registration settings are preserved even when the Clavinovas power is turned off (see page 206). You can also save individual registra- tions (or complete sets of 20 registra- tions) to floppy disk for future recall (see page 192).

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 0

7

Z Press the [REGISTRATION] button. .............................................

The [REGISTRATION] lamp lights.

X Select a bank. .......................................................................................................

Use the BANK [+] and [] buttons to select the bank that contains the desired registration.

The selected bank is displayed below and to the right of the style name in the main display.

C Select a registration. .....................................................................................

Press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRA- TION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration memory you want to recall.

Registration number and name

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

110 CVP-109/107/105/700

The number and name of the recalled registration appear below and to the right of the style name in the main display.

A pencil icon will appear to the right of the registration name in the display as soon as any change is made to the panel buttons or settings. The pencil icon is displayed to remind you that the current panel settings are different from those stored by the Registration function.

Registered panel settings are not recalled when a bank is selected. The settings are recalled only when one of the numbered buttons ([1] through [4]) is pressed.

When the LEFT PEDAL function is set to REGISTRATION (see page 190), the left pedal can be used to select the registration memories in sequential order (A1 through E4), letting you recall a different registration each time the pedal is pressed. However, other left pedal settings saved by the Regis- tration function cannot be recalled in this case.

You can use the Registration Freeze function to prevent certain panel settings from being changed when a Registration is recalled. This allows you to recall various registrations while using the Auto Accompaniment without suddenly changing the style or volume settings.

Z Open the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display. .....................

Protecting Panel Settings

You can also display this page by pressing the PAGE [<] button when the REGISTRATION [NAME] display is showing.

For a list of the settings in each freeze category, see page 13 in the Refer- ence Booklet.

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REGISTRATION].

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

The REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display appears.

Categories to be frozen are marked by an asterisk (*) in the menu listing. Also, the ON setting (in the ON/OFF function over the middle LCD button) is highlighted when a category to be frozen is selected.

Using Registrations

1 0

8

Freeze categories

CVP-109/107/700

Edit symbol

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

111CVP-109/107/105/700

X Indicate the categories to be frozen. ............................................

Freeze Categories Settings: ON, OFF Basic setting: ON (ACMP SETTING)

OFF (others) Backup of last settings: ON

Use the left and right LCD buttons (just the left LCD buttons on the CVP-105) to select a category, then press the ON/OFF button to mark or unmark the selected category.

You can also select a category using the CATEGORY and but- tons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons.

C Turn the Freeze function on or off. ................................................

Press the FREEZE LCD button to freeze or unfreeze the categories you marked in step 2.

A temporary name is given to each registration when you register the panel settings; however, you can change this name freely with this function.

Z Open the REGISTRATION [NAME] display. ...........................

Naming the Registration

You can also display this page by press- ing the PAGE [>] button when the REG- ISTRATION [FREEZE] display is show- ing.

Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by one of the numbered buttons ([1] through [4]) under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

Using Registrations

1 0

9

FREEZE Settings: ON (highlighted),

OFF (unhighlighted) Basic setting: OFF Backup of last setting: ON

To exit the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display and return to the main display, press [EXIT].

The FREEZE function is highlighted when the marked categories are frozen. When the Freeze function is off, the settings in all cat- egories are not protected.

V Exit the display. ...................................................................................................

Repeat this step to mark or unmark other categories, as needed.

CVP-109/107/700 The VOCAL HARMONY category is only available on the CVP-109/107/700.

112 CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select a registration to name. ..............................................................

Use the left and right LCD buttons to select the bank and name of the registration whose name you wish to change.

You can also select a registration bank and number using the BANK and or REGIST and buttons, respectively.

C Edit the registration name. ......................................................................

Press the NAME button to open the NAME display.

Use the CHAR > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the character you want to change (registration names can be up to 12 charac- ters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [] and [+] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the CHAR SET LCD button to enter the character at the cur- rent cursor position. Repeat this procedure until the registration name is complete. The BACK SPACE LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete the preceding character.

When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the selected registration, or CANCEL to abort.

Using Registrations

1 1

0

The REGISTRATION [NAME] page is displayed. The currently selected bank is highlighted, as is the name of the registration corresponding to the numbered button you pressed in step 1.

The display returns to the main display.

113CVP-109/107/105/700

CHAPTER 7: Song Control Song Playback

The Clavinova can play back songs recorded using the Song Record function (page 130), as well as song data included on various commercially available software disks. You can also play along on the keyboard as the songs play back. Moreover, when song data software includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the display during playback.

See Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (page 9) for information on using floppy disks.

The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs recorded on a single disk. Any songs exceeding this number will not be available for playback.

Playback data is normally not output via MIDI. However, you can set the Clavinova to output song data using the Song Transmission func- tion in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display (page 204).

In addition to songs youve recorded yourself, the CVP-109/107/105/ 700 can play back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC soft- ware, XG software, and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software. See Playing Other Types of Music Data on page 124.

Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is com- patible with the Lyric Display function of the Clavinova.

Z Enter the Song Play mode. .................................................................

Gently insert the included Music Software Collection disk or a disk containing songs youve recorded yourself into the disk drive. Make sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in the illustration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is auto- matically called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive.

Song Playback

The Song Play mode is not automatically engaged if the disk is inserted when one of the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page 192) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page 92) is showing.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

DISK IN USE

Sliding shutter

Label

1 1

1

114 CVP-109/107/105/700

The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the Clavinova reads and iden- tifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1) appears and the [SONG] lamp lights.

If a song disk has been inserted but the Song Play mode is not en- gaged, press the [SONG] button.

The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown.

X Select a song number. ................................................................................

Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG but- ton, data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon which indicates the type of the file are displayed.

Song numbers 1 through 99 are dis- played, including song numbers that contain no song data. However, no song names are displayed for song numbers that contain no data.

Select ALL if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order. Select RANDOM if you want all songs on the disk to be played at random. For either selection ALL or RANDOM the songs will be repeated until playback is stopped.

Current voice for the keyboard

File Icons There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file.

Refer to MIDI and Data Compatibil- ity (page 229) for information on file formats.

Icons are not shown for GM song files or song data files recorded with CVP models other than the CVP-109/ 107/105/700/103, the CVP-98/96/ 600, or the CVP-94/92.

Icons File Type

XG/SMF format file

DOC/ESEQ format file

Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file

Song data recorded with the CVP-109/107/105/700

Tempo

Selected song number/name

File icon

Song Playback

1 1

2

115CVP-109/107/105/700

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names in the disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the left/right LCD buttons, data dial, or [] and [+] buttons. You can also select the song by pressing the SONG and buttons. Up to ten song titles are shown in the display at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next ten titles will appear when you scroll past the last title shown in the display.

You can press the SONG button when song 1 is displayed to select the ALL setting, so the Clavinova will play back all songs on the disk in order. Pressing the SONG button a second time selects the RANDOM setting, which causes the Clavinova to play back all the songs in random order.

When nothing appears in the song name location This indicates that there is no song data for this song number.

Repeat Playback from a Specific Song If you first select ALL, and then select a song in the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3) by using the left/right LCD buttons, all songs will be repeatedly played back starting from the selected song.

Repeat Playback of a Single Song If you select a song in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3), and then select 1 SONG in the SONG PLAY [RE- PEAT] display (display page 4), only the selected song will be played back repeat- edly until stopped.

C Start and stop playback. ............................................................................

Start playback of the selected song by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button.

Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback.

Song playback stops.

You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

To exit the Song Play mode, press [SONG] or [EXIT]. The lamp turns off and the previous display appears.

Voice Selection During Playback The voice you play from the keyboard can be changed during song playback by selecting a voice in the normal way (page 31). The voices of the 1/RIGHT and 2/ LEFT parts being played back can be changed in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 118).

Please note that the song may not start immediately after you press [PLAY/ STOP].

Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp The keyboard guide lamps corresponding to the notes being played by the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts will light in real time. These guide lamps can be turned off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 128.)

Turning Off the Lyric Display Lyrics are shown in the display when playing back software which contains lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics from appearing, you can disable this function in page 5 of the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display.

Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback When you set the Left Pedal Function to START/STOP in the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display (display page 3), the left pedal will function like the [START/ STOP] button. (See page 190.)

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

Song Playback

Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM has been selected, the selected song will play through to the end, then playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and tempo will be shown in the display during playback.

You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

1 1

3

116 CVP-109/107/105/700

Adjusting the Tempo The playback tempo of the song can be changed as desired. (See page

27.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at any time by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [] and [+] buttons.

Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the free tempo software, - - - will appear in place of the tempo in the dis- play, and the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the dis- play when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range differs depending on the software).

The BEAT lamps (page 64) may not flash during playback of free-tempo software.

With some songs, the displayed meas- ure numbers may not match those marked on the score.

V Eject the disk. .......................................................................................................

When youve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drives EJECT button to remove it.

The LCD display returns to the main display.

CAUTION

Never take out the disk while the DISK IN USE lamp is lit or while a song is being played back.

Volume Adjustment for Each Part The volume of each part can be adjusted in the MIXER display.

Adjusting the Level Balance of Song Playback and the Keyboard Voices Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control (page 23) to adjust the volume.

When playing back a song recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700/103, the Auto Accompaniment can be turned on by pressing the [ACMP ON] button.

RESET

TEMPO

Song Playback

DISK IN USE

1 1

4

117CVP-109/107/105/700

The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accom- paniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are high- lighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.

Part Cancel

Parts can be switched on and off dur- ing playback.

Parts not having any data cannot be turned on. This applies when there is actually no data in the assigned track (page 118), or when the track assigned to the 2/LEFT part is set to TRK - - (OFF).

The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page 6 of the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 118).

In this example, 1/RIGHT is canceled.

In the case of Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/ESEQ files, the part indication does not appear for the parts without data.

Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On or Off Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all

orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 16) or all parts other than 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off individually in the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2).

Z Select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] page.

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2).

Tracks which contain data are indicated above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data are not displayed.

All track numbers appear whether, the tracks contain data or not, when a Stand- ard MIDI file song is selected (except songs recorded on the CVP-109/107/ 105/700/103, the CVP-98/96/600, and the CVP-94/92).

Song Playback

1 1

5

118 CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select the desired track for playback (PLAY/OFF, SOLO).

Select the track by using the TRACK < and >buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Turn playback on or off for the selected track by pressing the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback) or OFF. When a track is muted, the track number is ghosted and the sur- rounding box diappears. The voice used by the currently selected track is shown above PLAY/OFF.

Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel the Solo function.

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment

Assigning Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT .............................

Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT func- tions in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively turn playback of assigned tracks on or off. TRK - - (OFF) can be as- signed to 2/LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.

1/RIGHT Settings: 1 16 Basic setting: Depends on file type. 2/LEFT Settings: 1 16, -- (off) Basic setting: Depends on file type.

Select the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (display page 6) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

Press the 1/RIGHT button or the 2/LEFT button to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to assign the desired track.

You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT button. Tracks can only be assigned when play-

back is stopped at the top of the song.

Song Playback

1 1

6

The track assignments of DOC files and Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files are fixed, and therefore cannot be changed.

119CVP-109/107/105/700

The playback voice can only be changed when playback is stopped at the top of the song.

Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts ................

The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be se- lected in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display.

Press L&R VOICE or to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

You can also select a voice by using the L&R VOICE or .

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider can be used to control the overall volume of song playback.

When you enter the Song Play mode, the song volume level is auto- matically set to the volume level that was last set in the Song Play mode, regardless of the sliders position. After that, moving the slider will set the volume to the corresponding level.

Overall Song Playback Volume Control

If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on during playback of an original song that was recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700/103, the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control will affect the level of the Auto Accompaniment rather than that of song playback.

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Song Playback

1 1

7

120 CVP-109/107/105/700

To adjust the playback volume, voice, and pan settings, as well as the reverb, chorus, and effect depth for individual tracks, press the [MIXER] button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER display.

Adjustment of Track Settings

You can use the MIXER display to set the parameters listed below. See the indicated reference pages for descriptions of each parameter.

Parameters available in the MIXER display

When track 1 16 is selected:

VOLUME (See page 37.)

VOICE (See page 31.)

PAN (See page 37.)

REVERB DEPTH (See page 50.)

CHORUS DEPTH (See page 53.)

EFFECT DEPTH (See page 57 or 60.)

When TTL (Total) is selected:

TEMPO (See page 27.)

Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 49.)

REVERB TYPE (See page 49.)

CHORUS TYPE (See page 52.)

EFFECT TYPE (CVP-105) (See page 59.)

EFFECT1 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)

EFFECT2 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)

The Program Change Number (PRG#), Bank LSB (BNK LSB), and Bank MSB (BNK MSB) parameters, which are used to select voices via MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is selected.

Depending on the file type, some param- eters cannot be changed. For such pa- rameters, a Fixed indication is shown.

If you select the REVERB DEPTH pa- rameter while editing a track that was recorded using Natural Reverb (CVP- 109), the parameter name will appear as NATURAL REVERB DEPTH in the display.

On the CVP-109, the REVERB TYPE setting can be used to select a normal reverb type, but not a Natural Reverb type.

On the CVP-109/107/700, each of the two effect systems can be applied to a single track only. When you select EF- FECT1 TYPE or EFFECT2 TYPE, the number of the affected track is displayed along with the effect type. When you select EFFECT DEPTH, the number of the effect system applied to the selected track is displayed along with the effect depth value. (The EFFECT DEPTH setting is only available for the two tracks to which an effect system has been applied.)

SONG MIXER FUNCTION MASTER EQUALIZER

Song Playback

1 1

8

CVP-109/107/700

121CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Select the track to be changed. .........................................................

Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TTL (Total) will change the overall settings of the song rather than the set- tings of individual tracks.

Press the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the selected track.

Changing Settings in the MIXER Display

X Select the parameter to be edited. ..................................................

Press SELECT or to select the desired parameter.

Current value for the selected track

Depending on the file type, voice changes may only be possible for tracks 1 and 2.

C Edit the value or setting. ............................................................................

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the value or setting. You can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back, letting you immediately hear the results of your edits.

Selecting TTL and changing the REVERB DEPTH value will also affect the sound of your keyboard perform- ance.

The voices of tracks to which Auto Accompaniment, rhythm, and harmony data have been recorded can also be changed.

Volume range: 0 127

If another song is selected, all settings will return to the basic settings for the song (or the settings used to record the song).

If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on during playback of an original song that was recorded on the CVP-109/ 107/105/700/103, the MIXER display will function as Auto Accompaniment Part Volume Control (page 77) instead of Song Track Volume Control.

Parameter selected for editing

Song Playback

Selected track is highlighted.

1 1

9

CVP-109/107/700

CVP-109/107/700

122 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has convenient repeat functions that let you repeatedly play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is useful when you want to practice a difficult phrase.

Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4).

Repeat Functions

Four Repeat modes OFF (Repeat function is turned off) PHRASE (Phrase Repeat) 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat) AB mode (AB Repeat)

The ALL or RANDOM playback mode (in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display) will be disengaged when any of the Repeat modes are selected.

Any previously set Repeat mode will be reset to OFF when a different song is selected.

Phrase Repeat .......................................................................................................

When playing back Yamaha software that includes special phrase marks, such as DOC files, you can select specific phrase numbers (as indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly practice only the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the four songs for which notation is provided in the included Music Book.)

If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE or buttons, the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at the right of the button. Press PHRASE or to highlight the corre- sponding function in the display, then select the phrase number by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE or . Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back

repeatedly until playback is stopped.

Parts can be turned on/off even during the performance.

The Guide function can also be used simultaneously with Phrase Repeat.

When Phrase Repeat is started, a lead-in count automatically plays before the phrase. However, for free- tempo songs, a lead-in count is not available.

Song Playback

1 2

0

123CVP-109/107/105/700

1 Song Repeat ........................................................................................................

When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE or button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeat- edly until stopped.

Lead-in count is not played.

AB Repeat ...................................................................................................................

This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section for practice.

When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE or buttons, A and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to specify points A and B.

While the song is playing back, press the A button once at the be- ginning of the section to be repeated.

Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated. Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B) will begin automatically.

The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played back repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP] but- ton.

When both the A and B points have been specified, you can clear the A and B points by pressing the A button, or just the B point by press- ing the B button. You can then specify other A and B points within the song.

The specified A and B points will be erased when a new song number or another Repeat mode is selected.

A lead-in count automatically plays before the specified section AB Re- peat playback is started. However, for free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is not available.

To specify the A point as the begin- ning of the song, press A before playback starts. In this case a lead-in count is not available.

Specifying only the A point results in repeat playback between the A point and the end of the song.

The B point cannot be selected unless an A point is selected.

Song Playback

1 2

1

124 CVP-109/107/105/700

Pause .............................................................................................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop song playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to resume playback from the same point.

Rewind and Fast Forward .......................................................................

Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song.

While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time. Holding down either button continuously moves through the song in the corresponding direction.

During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No sound is produced during [REW] operation.

Other Playback Controls

Playing Other Types of Music Data

Using the [REW] button may cause the voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.

About Compatible Software ..................................................................

The CVP-109/107/105/700 can play back the following types of soft- ware.

Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC

Refer to MIDI and Data Compatibility (page 229) for information on the voice allocation formats and sequence formats.

The internal tone generator of the CVP-109/107/105/700 automati- cally resets for compatibility with either the Yamaha XG format (includ- ing GM System Level 1) or the Yamaha DOC voice allocation (page 229), depending on the playback data. (However, the selected voice allo- cation on the panel will not change.)

Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments ........................

Song data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/ 87A/59S/69A/69/79A/89/92/94/96/98/600/103) will normally be played back with the correct voices even though the volume balance may be slightly different. However, data recorded using the Auto Accompaniment function of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played back properly.

Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back.

Regardless of the type of software, only the following disk formats can be used: 3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format and 3.5" 2HD 1.44 megabyte format.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

Song Playback

1 2

2

The Lyric Display function (page 129) cannot be used with song data recorded in SMF format 1.

125CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has a special Guide function which allows you to practice by using the appropriate disk software. The piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you should play, and when you should play them. You can even practice at your own pace since the Clavinova pauses playback of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys. (You can try out the Guide function by pressing one of the GUIDE CON- TROL buttons during playback of the 4. GUIDE Demo song in the Demo mode.)

Guide Control

The Clavinova has three different Guide methods that can be selected depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning players should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note, then Sound Repeat.

Guide Methods and Piano Roll

FOLLOW LIGHTS and CueTIME software should be used with the Next Note method, as the Easy Play and Sound Repeat methods may not function properly with such software.

Practicing the Timing: Easy Play .....................................................

Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompani- ment plays back normally in tempo.)

Practicing the Notes: Next Note .......................................................

The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the Clavinova waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct note, you can practice at your own pace.

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by changing from lit-up to flashing.

If the guide lamps do not flash The guide lamps may not flash in the case of a few songs because of a special guide system. In case of such songs, however, you can switch to the Next Note method so that the lamps flash, if you like. See the Other Guide-related Func- tions on page 128. If the guide lamps and piano roll are transposed up or down The guide lamps and piano roll may be transposed up or down by one or two octaves for certain songs. The guide lamps and piano roll will not indicate notes exceeding the 88-key range of the keyboard.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

1 2

3

Keyboard guide lamps

126 CVP-109/107/105/700

Practicing Phrase-by-Phrase with the Playback: Sound Repeat .......................................................................................................

In the Sound Repeat method, the Clavinova plays back a short phrase. Listen to the phrase and practice.

As soon as you play the phrase correctly, the Clavinova will auto- matically play the next phrase.

Number of Repeats You can set the number of times the phrase will be repeated in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 129.)

The keyboard guide lamps can be turned on or off as desired in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 129.)

Piano Roll To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL

button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the cor- rect duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display.

Piano Roll ON/OFF The piano roll display can be turned on or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 129.)

Z Set up the desired song for practicing. .....................................

Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before call- ing up the Guide function.

Using the Guide Function

Before Practicing Before starting to practice, play back the entire song without canceling the part to be practiced and listen to it carefully. This will give you a clear idea of how the song should be played, and will make your practice sessions progress more smoothly.

Auto Part Cancel If you turn on the Guide function without canceling playback of the part to be practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided (or the 2/LEFT part is guided when the 1/RIGHT part contains no data). However, when you cancel the part before turning on Guide, the setting will be kept until the song is changed.

Guide Control

Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice your- self from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1).

1 2

4

127CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select the Guide method. .........................................................................

Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT].

The lamp of the corresponding button lights.

Turning Off the Keyboard Guide Lamps The keyboard guide lamp can be turned on and off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. (See page 128.)

When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons cannot be turned on The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be used only in the Song Play mode or when the 4. GUIDE Demo song is selected in the Demo mode. Only one Guide mode can be selected at a time.

C Practice the part. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback.

The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompaniment.

Piano Roll On/Off The piano roll display can be turned on or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 128.)

The correct melody plays back no matter which note you play in the EASY PLAY mode.

The Guide method can be changed during playback. However, the Guide method cannot be changed for songs in which SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE MODE location in SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] (display page 5).

The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in the Next Note or Sound Repeat methods.

V Stop your practice session. ..................................................................

The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button.

To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button - [EASY PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] - so that the lamp turns off.

The keyboard guide lamps light corre- sponding to the notes played by the 1/ RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song playback, even when Guide is set to off - unless the LAMP button is turned off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. The guide lamps indicate the notes to be played by both the 1/ RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when both are turned on or off; when only one of the parts is turned off, the lamps indi- cate the notes to be played by the part that is turned off.

The guide part can be selected, the piano roll and guide lamps can be turned on and off, and the Guide func- tion itself can be turned on or off during playback.

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

Guide Control

1 2

5

128 CVP-109/107/105/700

Playback tempo can be set to any desired value after a song has been selected by using the TEMPO [] and [+] buttons.

The Guide function may not work properly with software which was not produced for independent left- and right-hand playback.

Since the Guide phrases used in the Sound Repeat method are automati- cally determined by the Clavinova, they may not precisely match the actual musical phrases. Also, the phrases may become shorter when the Guide function is used for both the left- and right-hand parts.

Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).

Other Guide-related Functions

The settings made in this display will also be effective in the Guide function during playback of the 4. GUIDE Demo song in the Demo mode.

GUIDE MODE .........................................................................................................

NORMAL is usually displayed as the setting of the GUIDE MODE function in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. Change the set- ting to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE button; the part which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (dis- play page 1) can then be played with the regular Part Cancel function and the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played with the Easy Play function.

The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only for songs which have data in both the [1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts.

The ENSEMBLE mode cannot be used when Next Note or Sound Repeat is selected.

The GUIDE MODE setting can only be changed when playback is stopped at the beginning of a song.

When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song. To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button so that the indication changes to NORMAL.

The SPECIAL indication appears automatically depending on the song being played back. The SPECIAL indication will not appear, even when pressing the GUIDE MODE button, when playing back songs that do not feature the special method.

When using the Easy Play or Sound Repeat method, the respective method is still active, even if the SPECIAL indication is shown.

GUIDE MODE Settings: NORMAL, ENSEMBLE,

(SPECIAL) Basic setting: NORMAL or SPECIAL

(depends on song)

Guide Control

1 2

6

129CVP-109/107/105/700

Setting the Sound Repeat Number.............................................

To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Re- peat mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is se- lected, only the notes which have not been played correctly are re- peated; the Guide function will automatically go on to the next phrase once the previous one has been played properly.

SOUND REPEAT Settings: AUTO, 2 10 Basic setting: AUTO

The SOUND REPEAT setting can only be changed when playback is stopped at the beginning of a song.

Lyric Display ON/OFF................................................................................

To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the func- tion to OFF.

LYRICS Setting: ON, OFF Basic setting: ON

Piano Roll ON/OFF .......................................................................................

The piano roll display can be turned on or off by pressing the PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will ap- pear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this function is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback; when it is set to OFF, the piano roll is not displayed.

PIANO ROLL Settings: AUTO, ON, OFF Basic setting: AUTO

When a song contains lyrics, the Lyric Display function has priority over the Piano Roll function. The Piano Roll will be dis- played if you turn the Lyric Display function off as described above.

Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF .....................................................

To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set the function to OFF.

Guide Control

1 2

7

The Lyric Display function cannot be used with song data recorded in SMF format 1.

If a song does not contain lyric data, the LYRICS function will display a row of dashes (- - -). The LYRICS function cannot be selected when playing back such songs.

If an XF song that includes chord data is selected, the chords will be displayed in the lyrics display.

130 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova features comprehensive song recording func- tions that allow you to record your own performances to floppy disks. Four recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 132), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track Recording (page 135), with which you can record multiple instrumental parts; Chord Sequence (page 141), which lets you step-record Auto Accompaniment chords; and Step Edit, which you can use to edit or record song data one note at a time.

Song Recording

Structure of a Song A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to

a different track, as shown in the example below.

1 Piano (right-hand)

2 Piano (left-hand)

3 Bass

4 Strings : : 9 Rhythm

10 Rhythm : :

16 Organ

(Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.)

Sample song track chart

Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the display during operation. Refer to Messages (page 221) for informa- tion on the messages.

Refer to Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (page 9) for information on using floppy disks.

Songs recorded by the CVP-109/ 107/105/700 are saved as SMF (format 0) files. Songs recorded using the [XG] category voices are XG-compatible. See page 229 for information on the XG/SMF (format 0) format.

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

1 2

8

Up to 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the amount of data contained in each song.

Before you can record songs on a new disk, the disk must be formatted for use by the Clavinova (see page 131).

Track Part

131CVP-109/107/105/700

Song Recording

Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted for use. You can use the Format function in the FUNCTION [DISK 5] display (page 200) to re-format floppy disks that have already been used for recording.

Z Insert a disk. ........................................................................................................

Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk drive face-up and shutter end first, until it clicks into place.

A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a Start disk format? message appears in the display. To start format- ting, press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press CANCEL.

Recording Setup: Disk Format

The same display appears when inserting blank unformatted disks, or disks of differ- ent formats.

Format Types 2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB, while 2HD disks are formatted to 1.44 MB.

X Execute the format operation. .........................................................

An Are you sure? message appears in the LCD display; press YES to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it.

A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indi- cate progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the previous display when formatting is completed.

DISK IN USE

Shutter

Label side of disk

1 2

9

132 CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Insert a formatted disk. ...............................................................................

Make sure that the disks write protect tab is set to the write posi- tion, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks into place.

Quick Recording

The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the Clavinova reads and rec- ognizes the disk.

If the Song Play mode is not automatically called up, press the [SONG] button.

The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears. If the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown, use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select display page 1.

The Song Play mode is not automatically engaged if the disk is inserted when one of the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page 192) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page 92) is showing.

Using Style File Disks When using Style File disks, first load the desired data from the Style File disk (page 105), then insert the recording disk.

X Select the song number to be recorded. .................................

Select the SONG function, then use the SONG button, the data dial, or the [] and [+] buttons to select the desired song number for record- ing.

Select a song number between 1 and 60.

Write protect tab closed (unlocked write enabled)

DISK IN USE

Shutter

Label side of disk

Song Recording

1 3

0

If you select a song number between 61 and 99, you will not be able to select the Song Record mode in step 3. The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs on a single disk, but it can only record songs in song numbers up to 60.

The selected number is the location where the song will be recorded. If a song name appears beside the song number, the selected song al- ready contains data. Make sure that it doesnt contain data you want to keep before moving on to the next step! If you record to a song that con- tains data, the existing data will be replaced by the new data.

133CVP-109/107/105/700

C Select the Song Record mode. ..............................................................

Press the [REC] button.

The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display (Record mode page 1) appears.

Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons if the lamp is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown.

Once you have entered the Record Mode, you can press [REC] or [EXIT] at any time before step 6 to cancel recording without saving any data.

The song number for recording can be changed in the QUICK RECORD display.

If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on when you enter the Record mode, the ACMP&RHY track will automatically be set to REC.

Songs Recorded on Other Instruments The Clavinova may display the Convert

to CVP song? message (page 223) If you attempt to record data to a song created on another instrument. Press YES to convert the song before record- ing.

When a song is converted as described here, it may not be possible to record data in tracks other than tracks 1 or 2.

VSelect the part to be recorded. ........................................................

In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand part (1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accompaniment & rhythm part (ACMP&RHY). Press the appropriate button 1/ RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY to set the corresponding part to REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). The PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which already contain data.

The ACMP&RHY part can be set to REC automatically by pressing the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the rhythm, leave ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP ON] button so that the lamp goes out.

Both 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT cannot be set to REC at the same time.

Recording the Harmony Parts The Clavinova will record harmony notes when you record with the Harmony function (page 87) turned on. If the harmony type is set to Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5, the harmony notes will be recorded in the selected track. When any other harmony type is selected, the harmony notes will be recorded in tracks 6 through 8.

Recording in Dual/Split Mode If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Dual

mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 3. If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Split

mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5. If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Dual

mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 4. If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Split

mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 5. When the recording part is changed,

[HARMONY] and [SPLIT] are automati- cally turned off.

Recording the Auto Accompaniment When recording Auto Accompaniment,

the rhythm is recorded to tracks 9 through 10, bass to track 11, and chordal backing to tracks 12 through 16.

The Chord Sequence function (page 141) lets you record the Auto Accompaniment without having to play chord parts in tempo.

When any part is set to REC, the remain- ing capacity of the disk (in kilobytes) is shown below the measure indicator in the display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks should have about 690 KB (about 69,000 notes) and 1400 KB (about 140,000 notes), respectively.

When the ACMP&RHY part is set to REC, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide before recording is started.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

Song Recording

When a part is set to REC (recording enabled), the Synchronized Start function is set to stand-by, and recording automatically starts when you play the keyboard.

1 3

1

134 CVP-109/107/105/700

B Select the desired voices and style, etc. ................................

Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in the normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out the se- lected voices, style, tempo, or other settings, be sure to do so before en- tering the Song Record mode in step 3, since the recording will start as soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button.)

When Using Style File Disks When using Style File disks, make sure to load the data from the Style File disk (page 105) before inserting the disk for recording.

The Auto Accompaniment sections INTRO, AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE IN/OUT can be also recorded. Press the INTRO button before starting to record, the AUTO FILL buttons while recording, the ENDING button at the end of recording, and the FADE IN/OUT button at the beginning or ending of the recording. When the ENDING button or the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at the ending, recording stops automatically after the ending pattern or fade out.

Recording Along with the Metronome 1. After selecting the voice, press the

[METRONOME] button, and set the Beat parameter in the METRONOME display. The metronome will start sounding.

2. The recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. The metronome sound is not recorded.

When a disk is not inserted A song can be recorded to internal

memory if it is short enough. A maxi- mum of approximately 2500 notes (26 KB) can be recorded; however, the amount may be less if other functions are used. The internally recorded song will be deleted when the power is turned off or when another song is loaded. See Recording Without a Disk (page 174) for more information.

N Start recording. ...................................................................................................

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in the usual way (page 70), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the current accompaniment mode (pages 72 and 73).

Adjusting the Volume While Recording You can use the [ACMP/SONG VOL- UME] slider and the MIXER display to adjust the volume of the Auto Accompa- niment part while recording. Adjust the keyboard part volume using the KBD VOL function in the display.

If You Turn the Harmony Function or Split Mode On While Recording You can record harmony notes or left

range keyboard part while recording the 1/RIGHT part.

When the 2/LEFT part is being re- corded, the Clavinova will not record the harmony notes for harmony types that are recorded to tracks 6 through 8 (see the sidebar on page 133) or the left range keyboard part.

The keyboard guide lamps do not light up during recording.

Song Recording

1 3

2

135CVP-109/107/105/700

M Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display ap- pears.

If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop re- cording.

If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the key- board as well.

CAUTION

The Clavinova may continue to write data to the disk for a short time after you stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk while the DISK IN USE lamp of the disk drive is lit.

When a song has been recorded, the temporary name SONG *** (*** is the number) will automatically be given to the song. You can change the name as desired. (See page 166.)

The [ACMP ON] lamp automatically goes out when recording of these parts has finished.

When recording is finished, the song volume is automatically reset to the maxi- mum setting, regardless of the current [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider position.

< Play back the recording. ........................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

The recorded data will be played back.

During playback you can use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] but- tons to control the playback, and use the TEMPO [] and [+] buttons to change the tempo. You can also play along on the keyboard.

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at any time.

Track Recording (Multi-track Recording)

Song Recording

1 3

3

When style changes have been recorded in a song, playback may become slightly sluggish at points where the style changes, depending on the styles that were used.

Playback of songs recorded using both the Dual mode (page 38) and the Full Keyboard accompaniment mode (page 69) may also sound somewhat sluggish.

Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................

The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 132.)

X Select the TRACK RECORD page ...............................................

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD page (Record mode display page 2).

The 16 tracks appear above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a highlighted number. The numbers of tracks that do not contain data are not displayed.

136 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Select the desired track for recording. ......................................

Press the TRACK < and > buttons or use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the track.

Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can only be used to record the rhythm sound of the accompaniment style and cannot be used to record keyboard part. Also, the keyboard part should be recorded on a track other than those used for Harmony or Auto Accompani- ment.

When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10) or the Auto Accompaniment tracks (9 through 16) are set to RECORD, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide.

If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are already on when the Track Recording page is selected, the corresponding tracks are automatically record-enabled.

The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected tracks to RECORD (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). When a track is set to RECORD, the Synchronized Start mode is turned on. The Clavinova will start recording when you begin to play on the keyboard.

PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted, the track number is ghosted (shown in lighter indica- tion) in the display.

Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when re- cording keyboard parts.

If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks must be record-enabled.

If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously, three tracks must be selected.

If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the re- cording track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below.

* If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are au- tomatically set to record the Auto Accompaniment data. If the Har- mony function is turned on and a harmony type (page 88) other than Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5 is se- lected, tracks 6 through 8 are automatically set to record the Harmony data.

When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automati- cally selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to RECORD, PLAY, or OFF using the rightmost LCD button.

Song Recording

1 3

4

137CVP-109/107/105/700

V Set all performance features as required. ..........................

After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary perform- ance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb, etc.

B Start recording. ................................................................................................

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in the usual way (page 70), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the current accompaniment mode (pages 72 and 73).

The current measure number is shown in the display as you record. The parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you play. (Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and settings.)

Parameters Recorded for Each Track Notes Voice Keyboard volume Pan Right pedal (page 191) Left pedal (page 190) Center (sostenuto) pedal Reverb depth Chorus depth Effect depth Keyboard part volume (main, second, left) Fade-in/out (converted into volume data) Scale tuning data (page 209)

Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song Tempo Reverb type Overall reverb depth Chorus type Effect type* Equalizer settings (CVP-109/107/700) Accompaniment style Section (Intro, Main A through D, Fill-In, Ending)

* On the CVP-105, the last recorded track effect takes priority.

Other Recorded Parameters Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not listed above includes: Accompaniment part volume (volume settings in- cluded in style data, plus mixer levels set when re- cording)

Song Recording

1 3

5

If you want to re-record part of the song (for example, if youve made a mistake in the recording), you can easily do so with the Punch-in/out Recording function (page 138).

Backing Up Your Data Any time you have recorded some amount of data, you should copy the data to an- other song number for backup purposes (see page 196 for information on the Copy operation). Doing this prevents accidental loss of important data, should you inadvert- ently delete the data while recording.

138 CVP-109/107/105/700

N Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has been written to the disk, and the SONG PLAY display appears.

If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording.

If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well.

When recording is finished, the [ACMP/ SONG VOLUME] level is automatically set to the maximum value, regardless of the current slider position.

You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can also play back and monitor the previously recorded tracks while you record. By repeating this process, you can assemble a complete song.

Adding New Tracks

If you record on a track that has already been recorded, the previous material will be erased and the new material will be recorded in its place.

With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively re- record specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you to start recording from any punch-in point within a previously re- corded track and stop recording at any punch-out point, leaving intact all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punch- out point.

Punch-in/out Recording

Punch-in/out recording cannot be per- formed on tracks which have been used to record the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm parts, or on tracks 6 through 8 when these tracks have been used to record harmony parts (see sidebar on page 133).

Z Play back the song. .........................................................................................

Play back the song in order to locate the point where you want to punch in (i.e., start re-recording).

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

Song Recording

1 3

6

139CVP-109/107/105/700

X Pause before the punch-in point. ................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the punch-in point so youll be able to grasp the timing before you punch in.

C Turn on the Punch-in/out function. ............................................

Press the [REC] button.

The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears.

V Select a track. ....................................................................................................

Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the track.

The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected track to RECORD (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted, the track number is ghosted (shown in lighter indication) in the dis- play.

Auto Setting of Punch-in/out If no other track is selected, the last re- corded track is automatically selected for Punch-in/out.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

Song Recording

1 3

7

If you select a track that was used to record an Auto Accompaniment or rhythm part, or a track (6, 7, or 8) that contains a harmony part (see sidebar on page 133), you will not be able to set the track to RECORD.

140 CVP-109/107/105/700

B Select the punch-in mode........................................................................

Select the desired punch-in mode with the fourth LCD button. Two modes are available, as described below.

1ST KEY Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

PEDAL Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

When the PEDAL punch-in mode is selected, the left pedal is automatically assigned for this function only (the nor- mal pedal function is canceled).

N Select the punch-out mode. ...................................................................

Select the desired punch-out mode with the center LCD button. Two modes are available, as described below.

REPLACE When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out point will be erased.

PNCH.OUT When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out point will remain intact.

M Start playback and recording. .............................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from the current paused location.

To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the 1ST KEY mode is se- lected, simply begin playing at the point from which you want to record.

To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the PEDAL mode is selected, press the left pedal at the point from which you want to record.

When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is selected, recording can be started di- rectly by pressing the left pedal, without first pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback.

< Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display reappears.

When the PEDAL mode is selected, recording can also be stopped by press- ing the left pedal.

Song Recording

1 3

8

141CVP-109/107/105/700

The Chord Sequence function lets you enter Auto Accompani- ment data step-by-step according to chord names. You can use this function to record the accompaniment part without having to play the song in time with the rhythm or at a certain tempo.

Select the RECORD EDIT 1 display (page 3 of the Record mode display) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

1 3

9

Chord Sequence

Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................

Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a formatted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to enter the Record mode.

You cannot use the Music Database (page 79) or the Registration function (page 108) while recording data with the Chord Se- quence function.

X Turn on the Chord Sequence function. .................................

Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display. When Chord Sequence cannot be turned on The chord sequence function cannot be used when no disk has been inserted in the disk drive.

142 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Chord Sequence data will auto- matically replace any previous data in the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm tracks that was recorded in the Quick Record or Track Record modes.

Up to 999 measures can be recorded using the Chord Sequence function.

The chord input resolution will be automatically selected according to the current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord can be entered on every 8th note or 8th-note triplet. For other time signa- tures, one chord can be entered for each measure.

Entering Accompaniment Style and Section Changes One style change or section change (page 143) can be made at the beginning of each measure (The Intro pattern can only be entered at the beginning of a song.). However, Auto Fill data can be entered anywhere you desire.

C Move the cursor to the entry point. ...............................................

The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note divi- sions.

To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to the point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press one of the CURSOR < or > buttons to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CURSOR < and > buttons. Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accom-

paniment You can also enter volume changes for the Auto Accompaniment. Used judi- ciously, these can help you create pro- fessional-sounding dynamic changes in the Auto Accompaniment of your song. To do this, first enter the Auto Accompa- niment part volume data from the MIXER display; the volume event symbol ( ) will appear in the box in the middle of the display. To actually record the volume data at the current position, press the SET button in the CHORD SEQUENCE display. (An initial volume event is auto- matically entered at the beginning of a song.)

Chord Sequence

1 4

0

The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears, the Auto Accompani- ment is turned on, and the Fingered 1 accompaniment mode is selected.

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Mode Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned off while the Chord Sequence function is active. However, you can select an ac- companiment mode (other than Full Keyboard) in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by the [ACMP ON] button. The split point can also be changed in this display.

143CVP-109/107/105/700

V Enter and set the chords and/or style changes. ..........

To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering in the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point), or highlight ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT and/or TYPE buttons.

The names of chords entered using the keyboard are also displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions.

The name of the chord is displayed next to the keyboard icon in the box at the middle of the display.

To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make the appropriate selections in the normal way.

Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET button.

A black box and the recorded chord name appear above the line at the current position in the measure indicator, indicating that the data has been recorded at that position. The cursor auto- matically moves to the next position.

The recorded data is also shown in the display: the time signature, style name, and section appear at the top, and the chord name and tempo in the box at the middle of the display.

The chord name is indicated only at the first beat of the measure line, except when a style uses the 4/4 time signature, in which case the chord name is indicated at the first and third beats.

Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/ STOP] button.

The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.

Data Recorded by the Chord Sequence Function Accompaniment style

Section (MAIN A/B/C/D, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break)

Chord name

Tempo

Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings)

Rhythm on/off

ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)

A fade-out cannot be entered during a fade- in.

Entering Rhythm-only Sections You can also record the rhythm alone (with- out accompaniment) to your song. To do this, record a blank chord in the desired measure by leaving the TYPE function set to ---.

Entering a Break A complete break can be created by

setting the chord type to --- and setting the rhythm sound to OFF (see RHYTHM ON/OFF below).

The break fill pattern triggered by the left pedal (page 190) cannot be entered using the Chord Sequence function.

The Clavinova will normally play a fill-in pattern as it switches between variations (MAIN A through MAIN D). To have the Clavinova change the style variation at the start of a measure without playing a fill-in pattern, press the button for that variation twice before pressing SET.

The measure number is shown to the left of the measure indicator.

For information on other useful editing features, see Other Chord Sequence Functions, below.

The same chord cannot be entered twice in a row. If the chord displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions is the same as the last chord that was recorded, the Clavinova will not record a chord change when the SET button is pressed.

Chord Sequence

1 4

1

144 CVP-109/107/105/700

B Stop recording. ....................................................................................................

When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and input an end mark which determines the location of the ending. The end mark will be displayed in the box at the middle of the display.

The chord sequence data now resides in tracks 9 through 16, and can be played back in the normal way. Add other tracks as desired by using the standard track selection and recording procedure. You can also record over the Auto Accompaniment parts and replace them with original material if you like by using the standard track selection and record procedure.

The song recorded via the Chord Sequence function can be modified later by re-entering the Chord Se- quence mode and making the desired changes. However, keep in mind that any data recorded over the Auto Ac- companiment parts (with normal track recording) will be replaced by the preset accompaniment style data. (For example, even if youve recorded your own bass part, it will be erased and replaced by the original bass pattern if you correct the data in the Chord Sequence display.)

Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of versatile functions that help you enter chord sequence data more effi- ciently.

Finally, press the [REC] button; the Save recorded data? message will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automati- cally leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the SONG PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To continue editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL.

Other Chord Sequence Functions

ALL DELETE ................................................................. To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An Are

you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel.

DELETE ......................................................................... To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE

button. An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel.

1 4

2

Chord Sequence

145CVP-109/107/105/700

END MARK .................................................................... To enter an end mark at the current cursor location, press the END

MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the end of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. (An end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or Fade- out.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal data.

End Mark Unless an end mark is entered, the song will end one measure after the last entered data. If an Ending pattern or Fade-out is input, the song will end at the last measure of the Ending or Fade-out.

RHYTHM ON/OFF.......................................................... To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF but-

ton followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced following the location to which a rhythm off event is entered; the rhythm starts sounding again from the location to which a rhythm on event is entered.

1 4

3

The rhythm on/off status is displayed in the box at the middle of the display.

Chord Sequence

146 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Step Edit function gives you a convenient way to modify the individual notes and control changes that make up a song youve recorded. This function not only lets you change notes, it also allows you to adjust the timing, length, and velocity with which the notes are played. You can also modify other events, add or delete events, or even record entire songs one note at a time.

Use the following basic procedure to edit song data you have re- corded on a floppy disk. (See the Song Recording section in this chap- ter for descriptions of the various song recording methods.)

Z Insert the song data disk. ........................................................................

Editing Song Events

To edit a song that you have recorded in the Clavinovas internal memory, you must first use the Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the song onto a floppy disk.

The Step Edit function cannot be used to edit copied DOC files.

Insert a disk containing the song data you want to edit, just as you would to record a new song (page 132).

The SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears.

1 4

4

Step Edit

Tracks 1 through 16:

Event Type Description Page

Note Plays a note. 152

Control Change Changes controller settings (such as volume, etc.) 153

Program Change Changes the voice selection. 155

Pitch Bend Bends the pitch of notes up or down. 155

Channel Aftertouch Applies aftertouch to all notes. 156

Polyphonic Aftertouch Applies aftertouch to a single note (see note, below). 156

System Exclusive Sets instrument-specific data. 157

Editable Events SYSTEM Track:

Event Type Description Page

Tempo Sets the tempo. 151

Time Signature Sets the time signature. 152

Meta 157 Sets data not directly related to musical per- formance (such as lyrics, etc.)

The internal tone generator of the CVP-109/107/105/700 does not support polyphonic aftertouch. Although the Step Edit function lets you add polyphonic aftertouch data to a song (e.g., for use by other MIDI instruments), this data will not affect playback by the CVP-109/107/105/700.

147CVP-109/107/105/700

X Enter the Record mode. .........................................................................

Use the SONG function to select the song you want to edit (see page 132), then press the [REC] button.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC PLAY/ STOP

The Record mode display appears.

C Select the Step Edit function. ..........................................................

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the RECORD EDIT 1 display page (page 3 of the Record mode display), then press the STEP EDIT LCD button.

The Clavinova displays the Dont remove the disk! mes- sage and a bar graph as it reads the song data. After a few mo- ments, the STEP EDIT display appears.

Location

Events An event is one of the many pieces of data (such as notes, control changes, program changes, etc.) that make up a song.

Right LCD functions Events

CURSOR functions

1 4

5

Step Edit

The Clavinova may not be able to enter Step Edit mode while editing a particularly large song. If this happens, the Not enough memory! message will be displayed when you select the STEP EDIT function.

148 CVP-109/107/105/700

The track selector is highlighted, and the event data for the se- lected track is displayed.

N Select an event to edit. ...............................................................................

V Select a track to edit. .................................................................................

Track selector Settings: SYSTEM, TRACK 1 16

Press the uppermost left LCD button once to highlight the track selector, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to select the track you want to edit.

System Exclusive events (see page 146) are loaded into Track 1.

Meta events (see page 146) are loaded into the SYSTEM track.

B Select a location. ............................................................................................... Measure selector The measure selector can be set to

INITIAL (in which case the beat and clock values are not displayed), or to any value between 1 and 9999.

The INITIAL setting is used to set events (such as the voice selection or volume events) that occur before the song begins. (Actual song playback begins with the first beat of measure 1.)

Press uppermost left LCD button again to highlight the right side of the location indicator, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to select the measure you want to edit.

The selected measure is highlighted, and the beat and clock val- ues are displayed.

Beat and clock The beat value can be set to any value

between 1 and n, where n is the number of beats in the selected meas- ure.

Each quarter note is divided into 480 smaller units (numbered 0 to 479), which can be used to set the timing of events that dont occur precisely on the beat. If each beat is a quarter note, for example, the location clock values of two eighth notes might be set to 0 and 240, whereas those of four sixteenth notes would be set to 0, 120, 240, and 360.

Repeat this step to set the beat and clock values. The track selec- tor, measure selector, beat, and clock values are highlighted in turn with each press of the uppermost left LCD button.

The first four events that occur at or after the specified location are displayed. The first of these events is highlighted.

Scrolling the Event List To display other events before or

after the selected timing, hold down one of those four buttons, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to scroll the event list up or down.

You can also press the TIMING LCD button to select the double-pointed arrow ( ) symbol in the leftmost column of event data, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to scroll the event list.

Use one of the bottom four buttons to the left of the LCD to select the corresponding event in the display.

The selected event is highlighted, and the timing of that event is shown as the location in the first line of the display.

Measure Beat Clock

Step Edit

1 4

6

149CVP-109/107/105/700

CURSOR functions Each of the CURSOR functions at the

bottom of the STEP EDIT display corre- sponds to one or more parameters in the event list.

The number and type of CURSOR func- tions displayed depends on the type of event selected. (See the list on page 151 for details.)

When a CURSOR function corresponds to two or more parameters, press the LCD button one or more times until the desired parameter is selected.

Press the LCD button corresponding to one of the CURSOR func- tions to select an event parameter. (See the next two subsections for descriptions of the event parameters.)

The selected parameter is reverse-highlighted (i.e., it is dis- played in normal rather than reverse video).

Use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of the selected parameter.

A pencil symbol is displayed to the right of the edit data to re- mind you that youve changed one or more parameters.

< Record your changes. ..............................................................................

TIMING parameters

If you select a different event without first recording your changes, the event you just edited will revert to its previous set- tings and any changes you made will be lost.

If you dont see the function at the right edge of the display, press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button) to display it.

Repeat step 7 as needed to change other parameters in the selected event. Then, when youve finished editing the event, press the button (the fourth right LCD button) to record your changes.

The pencil symbol is removed from the edited event.

> Save the edited song data. ..................................................................

M Select and edit a parameter. ..............................................................

Checking your Changes You can press the [PLAY/STOP] button

at any time while youre editing song data to check the changes youve made. Playback begins from the top of the measure that includes the currently high- lighted event.

You can control playback using the [PAUSE], [REW], and [FF] buttons. (The [REW] and [FF] buttons can even be used while playback is paused.)

When you pause the playback or press [PLAY/STOP] to stop it, the most recent event is highlighted in the display.

Repeat steps 5 through 8 to edit other events in the selected track, or steps 4 through 8 to edit other tracks. When youve finished editing the song, save the song data to disk as described on page 165.

EVENT TYPE parameter

NOTE NUMBER parameter

VELOCITY parameter

GATE TIME parameters

Edit symbol

Step Edit

1 4

7

150 CVP-109/107/105/700

Every event contains three types of data: the timing, the event type, and at least one event-specific parameter. Use the procedures below to change an events timing or type.

Changing the Timing of an Event .....................................................

Common Parameters

INITIAL timing You cannot change the timing of an event that is set to INITIAL timing. When you select such an event, the TIMING button will only select the double-pointed arrow symbol.

You can use the TIMING function to change the timing of an event. Select the event whose timing you want to change as described in the preceding subsection, then press the TIMING LCD button.

The first thing the TIMING function selects is the double-pointed arrow symbol in the leftmost column of event data. You can use this symbol to scroll the event list and display other events (see the sidebar on page 148).

The TIMING function also selects three parameters the measure, beat, and clock values that determine the timing of the event. You can change these parameters much as described for the location setting (page 148), save that you use the TIMING function rather than the topmost left LCD button to select between the parameters.

Changing the Event Type ..........................................................................

Double-pointed arrow

The number of event-specific param- eters that are displayed for a given event depends on the events type. See the next subsection for a discus- sion of the various event-specific pa- rameters, as well as the CURSOR functions that are used to select these parameters.

If you change an event to an event type which is not being displayed in the event list (see page 161), the event will disappear after you record the change (see step 8 on page 149).

To change an events type, select the event you want to change as described in the preceding subsection, then press EVENT TYPE LCD button.

The event type icon is reverse-highlighted.

Use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to select a different event type.

Measure

Beat

Clock

1 4

8

Although the measure value selected by the TIMING function has a range of 1 to 9999, the thousands digit is not shown; hence, an actual value of 1000 will ap- pear in the display as 000.

Step Edit

See the Editable Events table on the next page for a list of event types that can be selected.

The Tempo, Time Signature, and Note events cannot be selected at the INI- TIAL timing.

151CVP-109/107/105/700

Although every event has at least one event-specific parameter, some event types require that several parameters be set. The tables below list the CURSOR functions that are used to select event-specific parameters, and the number of parameters selected by each.

Event-specific Parameters

Use the procedures in this subsection to change the event-specific parameters for each event type.

Changing the Tempo ................................................................................... Tempo Range: 32 280Select the Tempo event you want to edit in the event list for the

SYSTEM track.

The TEMPO function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.

Press the TEMPO LCD button, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the tempo value.

TEMPO function

Editable Events SYSTEM Track:

Event Type Functions Parameters

Tempo TEMPO 1

Time Signature TIME 2

Meta < and > up to 35

Tracks 1 through 16:

Event Type Functions Parameters

Note

NOTE NUMBER 1

VELOCITY 1

GATE TIME 3

Control Change CONTROL NUMBER 1

DATA 1

Program Change PROG. NUMBER 1

Pitch Bend DATA 1

Channel Aftertouch DATA 1

Polyphonic Aftertouch NOTE NUMBER 1

DATA 1

System Exclusive < and > up to 35

Tempo

1 4

9

Step Edit

152 CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Time Signature ...............................................................

Time Signature Settings: 1/2 4/2,

1/4 8/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

Select the Time Signature event you want to edit in the event list for the SYSTEM track.

The TIME function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.

Use the TIME button to select the numerator or the denominator of the time signature, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] but- tons to change the selected value.

Editing a Note .........................................................................................................

Select the Note event you want to edit in the event list for the appro- priate track (1 through 16).

TIME function

The NOTE NUMBER, VELOCITY, and GATE TIME functions are displayed above the third, fourth, and fifth LCD buttons.

Each note is defined by three pieces of data (in addition to the timing, which is described on page 150).

Note Number Note Number Range: C2 G8The note number determines which note on the keyboard is played.

Use the NOTE NUMBER button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the note number.

Velocity Velocity Range: 1 (min.) 127 (max.)The velocity setting determines how hard the note is played. Use the

VELOCITY button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the velocity.

Numerator value

Denominator

Note event functions

Note number

Velocity Gate time

1 5

0

Step Edit

153CVP-109/107/105/700

Gate Time Beat value Range: 0 99 Clock value Range: 0 479

The gate time setting determines the length of the note. You can set the gate time either by using the beat and clock parameters, just as you would to set the location of the note event (see page 152), or by selecting a note type from the third gate time parameter (displayed in brackets).

Use the GATE TIME button to select the beat value, the clock value, or the note type parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of the selected parameter.

When setting the gate time, keep in mind that the gate time of a note is generally set shorter than the timing interval for an equivalent note. For example, although the timing of consecutive eighth notes would differ by a clock value of 240, the note type parameter automati- cally sets gate time clock value of each eighth note to 192. This pre- vents the notes from running together.

Beat value

Varying note lengths You can vary the playing style by changing the gate time of the notes in a song. De- crease the gate time to make a note more staccato; increase it to make the note more tenuto.

Changing a Controller Setting ..........................................................

Select the Control Change event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).

The CONTROL NUMBER and DATA functions are displayed above the third and fourth LCD buttons.

Each control change is defined by two pieces of data (in addition to the timing, which is described on page 150).

Control Change event functions

Clock value

Note type

Control number

Control data

1 5

1

Step Edit

154 CVP-109/107/105/700

Control Number

Control Data

Control Number Settings: See table at left.

The control number setting determines which controllers setting is changed by the event. Use the CONTROL NUMBER button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the control number.

Controllers

Control Data Range: 0 127

The control data indicates the new setting of the specified controller. Use the DATA button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the data value.

Display No. MIDI Data

Bank-M 000 Bank Select (MSB)

Mod 001 Modulation

: : :

PortTm 005 Portamento Time

Data-M 006 Data Entry (MSB)

Vol 007 Main Volume

: : :

Pan 010 Pan

Exp 011 Expression

: : :

Bank-L 032 Bank Select (LSB)

: : :

Data-L 038 Data Entry (LSB)

: : :

Sus 064 Sustain

Port 065 Portamento

Sos 066 Sostenuto

Soft 067 Soft Pedal

: : :

Harmo 071 Harmonic Content

RlseTm 072 Release Time

AtckTm 073 Attack Time

Bright 074 Brightness

: : :

PortCn 084 Portamento Control

: : :

Rev 091 Reverb Send Level

: : :

Cho 093 Chorus Send Level

Var 094 Variation Send Level

: : :

DatInc 096 Data Increment

DatDec 097 Data Decrement

NRPN-L 098 NRPN (LSB)

NRPN-M 099 NRPN (MSB)

RPN-L 100 RPN (LSB)

RPN-M 101 RPN (MSB)

: : :

SundOf 120 All Sound Off

RstCnt 121 Reset All Controllers

Local 122 Local Control

NoteOf 123 All Notes Off

OmniOf 124 Omni Mode Off

OmniOn 125 Omni Mode On

Mono 126 Monophonic Mode

Poly 127 Polyphonic Mode

1 5

2

Step Edit

155CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Voice Selection ...........................................................

You can select a different voice in the same bank as the currently selected voice using a single Program Change event.

To select a voice in a different bank, the Program Change event must be pre- ceded by two Control Change events (see the preceding operation) setting the Bank-M and Bank-L controllers.

See the voice list on page 3 of the Refer- ence Booklet to determine the bank and program numbers for the desired voice.

Select the Program Change event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).

The P.CHG NUMBER function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.

Use the P.CHG NUMBER button to select the Program Change Number parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] but- tons to change the Program Change Number.

P.CHG NUMBER function

Program Number Range: 0 127

Bending the Pitch ...........................................................................................

Pitch Bend Data Range: 8192 +8191

Pitch Bend Range The actual amount by which the pitch is bent depends on the BEND RANGE value set in the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display (page 191) when song data is recorded.

Select the Pitch Bend event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).

The DATA function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.

Use the DATA button to select the pitch bend data parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of this parameter.

DATA function

Program Change Number

Pitch bend data

1 5

3

Step Edit

156 CVP-109/107/105/700

Applying Aftertouch to All Notes .......................................................

Aftertouch Data Range: 0 127Select the Channel Aftertouch event you want to edit in the event list

for the appropriate track (1 through 16).

The DATA function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.

Use the DATA button to select the channel aftertouch data param- eter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of this parameter.

Applying Aftertouch to Individual Notes ..................................

Select the Polyphonic Aftertouch event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).

DATA function

The NOTE NUMBER and DATA functions are displayed above the third and fourth LCD buttons.

Each Polyphonic Aftertouch event is defined by two pieces of data (in addition to the timing, which is described on page 150).

Note Number

Polyphonic Aftertouch event functions

Note Number Settings: C2 G8

The note number setting determines which note is affected by the aftertouch event. Use the NOTE NUMBER button to select this param- eter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the note number.

Channel aftertouch data

Note number Polyphonic aftertouch data

1 5

4

Step Edit

The internal tone generator of the CVP- 109/107/105/700 does not support poly- phonic aftertouch. Although the Step Edit function lets you add polyphonic aftertouch data to a song (e.g., for use by other MIDI instruments), this data will not affect playback by the CVP-109/107/105/ 700.

157CVP-109/107/105/700

Polyphonic Aftertouch Data Aftertouch Data Range: 0 127

The polyphonic aftertouch data setting determines the amount of aftertouch that is applied to the specified note. Use the DATA button to select the polyphonic aftertouch data parameter, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of this parameter.

Editing System Exclusive and Meta Events ...................... Exclusive data (see page 146) is loaded

into Track 1. Meta events (see page 146) are loaded

into the SYSTEM track. Meta events that cannot be edited will not

appear in the event list.

Select the System Exclusive or Meta event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 or SYSTEM).

The < and > functions are displayed above the third and fourth LCD buttons.

Every System Exclusive or Meta event is displayed as a series of two-digit hexadecimal values, each of which represents a byte of data.

< and > functions

System Exclusive Data First byte: F0 Data bytes: 00 7F Last byte: F7

Meta Event Data First byte: FF Data bytes: 00 FF

Use the < and > buttons to select a data byte, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value of the selected byte. Repeat to edit other bytes as needed.

System exclusive data

1 5

5

The Clavinova can only display the first 35 bytes in a System Exclusive or Meta event. Any bytes of data beyond this limit cannot be edited using the Step Edit function.

Step Edit

158 CVP-109/107/105/700

In the preceding subsections of this chapter you learned how to edit the various data parameters that make up an event. The Step Edit mode also lets you add, delete, copy, and move events.

Adding an Event ..................................................................................................

Editing the Event Lists

When an event is added When you add an event to the SYS-

TEM track, the new event appears as a Tempo event with a tempo value of 120. At the INITIAL timing, a Meta event (FF 01 00) is added instead.

When you add an event to one of the other tracks (1 through 16), the new event appears as a Note event with a note number value of C3. At the INI- TIAL timing, a Control Change event (Bank-M, control data value 0) is added instead.

If there is already one or more events at the specified location, a copy of the highlighted event is inserted below it.

Use the following procedure to add a new event to a track event list:

Z Enter the location of the new event.

Enter the event location as described in step 5 of the basic editing procedure (page 148). If there is already an event at the desired loca- tion, you can select that event as described in step 6 of the editing procedure (page 148).

The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is high- lighted.

X Insert the new event. If you dont see the INS function at the right edge of the display, press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button) to display it.

Press the INS button (the second right LCD button).

A new event is added to the event list. The new event is high- lighted.

C Edit the new event.

Use steps 7 and 8 of the basic editing procedure (page 149) to edit the newly inserted event.

Deleting an Event ...............................................................................................

Use the following procedure to delete an event from an event list:

Z Select the event to be deleted.

Select the event you want to delete as described in steps 5 and 6 of the basic editing procedure (page 148).

The selected event is highlighted.

1 5

6

Step Edit

159CVP-109/107/105/700

X Delete the selected event. If you dont see the DEL function at the right edge of the display, press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button) to display it.

Press the DEL button (the middle right LCD button).

The selected event is removed the event list.

Moving or Copying an Event ..............................................................

Use the following procedure to move or copy one or more events to another location in the event list, or to the event list for a different track:

Z Shift the right LCD functions.

Press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button).

The SHFT function is highlighted, and set of different editing functions is displayed at the right edge of the display.

1 5

7

It is not possible to move or copy events when editing the SYSTEM track event list. (The MARK, CUT, COPY, or PST functions cannot be selected when editing this track.)

Step Edit

160 CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select the event to be moved or copied.

Select the event you want to move or copy as described in steps 5 and 6 of the basic editing procedure (page 148).

The selected event is highlighted.

If you want to move or copy a series of two or more consecutive events, press the MARK button (the top right LCD button), then select the last event in the series as described in steps 5 and 6 of the basic editing procedure (page 148).

Copying multiple events If you decide not to copy a series of

events, simply press the MARK button so that the MARK function is no longer highlighted.

Events that arent displayed in the event list (see page 161) will not be copied or moved, even if they are within the selected range.

All of the selected events are highlighted.

C Cut or copy the selected events.

Press CUT (the second right LCD button) if you intend to move the selected events to another location, or COPY (the middle right LCD button) if you want to copy them.

If you press CUT, any highlighted events are removed from the event list. If you press COPY and multiple events were selected in step 2, they are no longer highlighted.

V Select the destination location.

Enter the track and location where you want to move or copy the se- lected data as described in steps 4 and 5 of the basic editing procedure (page 148). If there is already an event at the desired location, you can select that event as described in step 6 of that procedure (page 148).

The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is high- lighted.

B Paste the data in the new location. Pasting multiple copies You can repeat steps 4 and 5 to paste

multiple copies of the same data, just as long as you havent cut or copied other data in the meantime.

Events that arent displayed in the event list (see page 161) will not be pasted, even if they were within the range of events selected for cutting or copying.

Press the PST button (the fourth right LCD button).

Any events that were cut or copied in step 3 are pasted into the specified location.

1 5

8

Step Edit

161CVP-109/107/105/700

As youre editing song data in Step Edit mode, you may at times find that the sheer number of events makes it difficult to locate the data youre looking for. The Clavinova lets you simplify the process by limiting the types of events that are displayed in the event lists.

Z Open the STEP EDIT [EVENT DISPLAY] page. ..............

Press the PAGE [>] button once or twice to display page 3 of the STEP EDIT display.

Filtering the Event List

X Select an event type................................................................................... Shortcuts To display only note data, just press the

NOTE ONLY button. To display all data in the event lists,

press the ALL ON button.

Time signature and tempo data is always displayed.

Use the and functions (the second and third left LCD buttons) to move the selection bar up or down to the name of an event type that you want to hide (or reveal) in the event lists.

The selected event type is highlighted.

C Uncheck the event types that you want to hide. .........

Press the SET button to remove (or display) the check mark next to the selected event type. Event types without check marks will be not be displayed in the event lists.

1 5

9

Step Edit

Note data will be displayed in the STEP EDIT [NOTE RECORD] display page (page 2 of the STEP EDIT display) even when there is no check mark by the Note event type in the STEP EDIT [EVENT DISPLAY] page.

V Return to the event list display. .....................................................

Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed to hide (or reveal) other event types, then use the PAGE [<] button to return to the event list you were pre- viously editing.

Only the selected event types are now displayed in the event list.

162 CVP-109/107/105/700

Page 2 of the STEP EDIT display contains functions that let you record music one note at a time. Use the following procedure to add new note data to a song that youre editing in Step Edit mode.

Z Open the STEP EDIT [NOTE RECORD] page. .....................

Recording Music in Step Edit Mode

Recording from Scratch You can record an entire song in Step

Edit mode, if you like. Just insert a floppy disk, select an unused song number, and press the [REC] button to start recording, then follow the proce- dure described here to begin entering note data.

When recording notes in Step Edit mode, make sure the current voice selection matches that of the track youre recording to. If a different voice is used, the notes may be recorded at the wrong pitch.

When certain voices are used, the LCD may display pitches one or two octaves higher or lower than the notes that were played. This is normal; during playback, the notes will be played back as re- corded.

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display page 2 of the STEP EDIT display.

Location

X Select the location for the new note. ...........................................

Enter the track and location where you want to record the new note as described in steps 4 and 5 of the basic editing procedure (page 148). If there is already an event at the desired location, you can select that event as described in step 6 of the editing procedure (page 148).

The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is high- lighted.

C Select a dynamic. .............................................................................................. Dynamic Setting: KBD, fff ppp Basic setting: KBD

Press the first right LCD button to display the dynamic for the note you are going to record. The dynamic you select determines the velocity of the note. You can select one of eight dynamic symbols from fff to ppp or KBD. If you select KBD, the Clavinova will record the actual velocity that you play on the keyboard.

The dynamic changes each time you press the button.

1 6

0

Dynamic

Note Style

Note Type

It is not possible to record note data in the SYSTEM track, or at the INITIAL timing in tracks 1 through 16.

If you try to enter note data at the INITIAL timing in tracks 1 through 16, the note data will be recorded at the top of the first measure (timing 1:1:0) instead.

Step Edit

163CVP-109/107/105/700

V Select a note style. .......................................................................................

Note Style Setting: (normal),

(staccato), (tenuto)

Basic setting:

Press the second right LCD button to display the playing style for the note you are going to record. The style you select affects the gate time of the note. You can select one of three styles: normal, staccato, or tenuto.

The note style changes each time you press the button.

B Select a note type. ........................................................................................ Note Type Setting: (normal),

(dotted), (triplet)

Basic setting:

Press the third right LCD button to display the type of note you want to record. You can select one of three note types: normal, dotted, or triplet.

The note type that you choose here will be used to modify the note or rest length you specify in step 6, below. To enter a dotted quarter note, for example, you would select (dotted) here, then press the (quarter note) button in step 6.

The note type changes each time you press the button.

N Enter a note or a rest. ...............................................................................

To record a note (or chord): If you press an LCD button without hold- ing down a key on the keyboard, the previously specified note data (i.e., dy- namic, note style, and note type) will be recorded.

If there is already a note of the same pitch at the specified location, the new note will not be entered.

Hold down one or more keys on the keyboard, then press the LCD button that corresponds to the desired note length (from whole note to sixteenth note).

The specified note data is added to the event list, and the timing is advanced according to the selected note length. (If more than one key was held down, note data for each key is recorded at the specified timing.)

1 6

1

Step Edit

164 CVP-109/107/105/700

To record a rest:

Press the bottom right LCD button.

Checking your Changes You can press the [PLAY/STOP] but-

ton at any time while youre recording note data to check the changes youve made. Playback begins from the top of the measure that includes the currently highlighted event.

You can control playback using the [PAUSE], [REW], and [FF] buttons. (The [REW] and [FF] buttons can even be used while playback is paused.)

When you pause the playback or press [PLAY/STOP] to stop it, the most recent event is highlighted in the dis- play.

When youve finished recording note data, save the song data to disk as described in the following subsection.

The REST function is highlighted, and the note functions at the bottom of the display are replaced by rest functions.

Press the LCD button for the desired rest length (from whole rest to sixteenth rest).

The location is advanced according to the selected rest length.

Press the bottom right LCD button a second time to redisplay the note functions.

M Record a tie, if necessary. .......................................................................

If you have recorded a note or chord in the last step, you can double its length using the TIE function. Press the fourth right LCD button.

The gate time of the preceding note or chord is doubled, and the timing is advanced to match the increased note length.

You can press the TIE button twice to triple the length of a note or chord, three times to quadruple it, and so on.

< Record other notes. ........................................................................................

Since the timing value is automatically advanced when you record notes or rests, you dont have to set the timing for the next note. Repeat steps 3 through 7 as needed to record other notes and rests.

> Save the edited song data. ......................................................................

1 6

2

Step Edit

165CVP-109/107/105/700

Use the following procedure to save the data you have edited or re- corded in Step Edit mode:

Z Open the STEP EDIT page, if necessary. ................................

If you are currently using page 2 or 3 of the STEP EDIT display, press the PAGE [<] button once or twice to display page 1.

Saving Your Changes

X Select the save function. .......................................................................

If you dont see the function at the right edge of the display, press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button) to display it.

Press the top right LCD button to select the function.

Exit Without Saving If you try to exit the Step Edit mode without first saving the data that you have edited or recorded, the Clavinova will display a Write edited data? message. Press YES if you want to save the data, NO to exit the Step Edit mode without saving, or CANCEL to return to Step Edit mode. If you select YES, the Are you sure? message will be dis- played. Follow steps 3 and 4 of the proce- dure at left to save and exit.

Press either [REC] or [EXIT] once to exit the Step Edit mode, or twice to exit the Song Record mode altogether.

The Are you sure? message is displayed.

C Select a song number, if necessary. .........................................

Use the SONG and buttons to select a different song number. (If you do not change the song number, the original version of the song will be replaced by the edited data.)

The selected song number is displayed by the SONG function. If a song name is also displayed, the selected song number con- tains song data that will be replaced by the edited data.

V Save the data. ....................................................................................................

Press OK to save, or CANCEL to return to Step Edit mode.

If you press OK, the Clavinova will display the Dont remove the disk! message and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then redisplays the STEP EDIT page.

B Exit the Step Edit mode. ........................................................................

1 6

3

CAUTION

You cannot save the edited song data to a different disk. If you remove the disk from the disk drive before saving the song (that is, before completing step 4 of this procedure), any changes you have made in the Step Edit mode will be lost.

Step Edit

166 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Record mode has a number of other convenient editing functions that provide even greater control over the song data. The Record Edit functions include: Song Name, which lets you name a recorded song file; Track Edit, which gives you a variety of track-related editing controls, such as Track Mix and Track Delete; Initial Edit, which lets you change the data at the beginning of a song, such as voice, reverb, and effect settings; and Setup Memory, which lets you save the Clavinovas current panel settings as part of the currently selected song. On the CVP-109/107/700 there is also a Vocal Harmony Memory func- tion, which you can use when you want to save the current Vocal Harmony settings as part of the currently selected song.

You can select the Record Edit functions from the RECORD EDIT 1 and RECORD EDIT 2 displays (Record mode display pages 3 and 4) after selecting the song you wish to edit.

This function is used to name song files recorded with the Clavinova or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name function, press the SONG NAME button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display.

Song Name

The Song Name function cannot be used when a disk has not been inserted in the disk drive.

CVP-109/107/700

1 6

4

Other Record Edit Functions

167CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Enter the desired name. .........................................................................

Use the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor to the desired character position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12 characters in length).

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select and highlight the character or mark you wish to enter.

Press the CHAR SET button to enter the selected character to the current cursor position and move to the next position. Continue enter- ing other characters or marks in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD EDIT 1 display, press the CANCEL button.

X Register the name. .......................................................................................

When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to regis- ter it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To cancel the operation, press the CANCEL button.

Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display to call up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK EDIT display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and TRACK EDIT [QUANTIZE].

Track Mix (TRACK EDIT page 1) The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified

tracks and copies the result to a third specified track.

Track Edit

Track Copy Only tracks containing data can be selected by the TRACK A and TRACK B functions. In addition, --- (no track) can also be selected for TRACK B. In this case, the data in track A will simply be copied to track C.

For the Track Mix function, the selected track voice and volume data, etc. (i.e., all data except note data) in track A will be effective for the destination track after the mix operation.

1 6

5

Other Record Edit Functions

168 CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Specify the two tracks to be mixed. ..............................................

Press the TRACK A and TRACK B buttons to highlight the correspond- ing functions, and use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the numbers of the two tracks to be mixed. The voices which are used for the selected tracks are indicated above these functions in the LCD display.

X Specify the destination track. ..............................................................

Use the TRACK C function to specify the track to which you want to record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed data by pressing the TRACK C button to highlight the corresponding func- tion, then using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.

Any previous data in the destination track will be erased.

C Execute the Track Mix operation. ....................................................

Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation. An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to execute the Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel.

When the operation is completed, the MIX function will be replaced by the UNDO function, allowing you to undo the Track Mix operation and restore the previous data.

Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix function.

You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT] button.

The original data will remain in tracks A and B after the Track Mix function is executed. If the old data is not needed, you should delete it. (See Track De- lete, below.)

A bar graph indicating the progress of the Track Mix operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/ STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.)

The Undo function cannot be used once youve selected another track or exited from this mode.

The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 174).

Track Delete (TRACK EDIT page 2) The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any

specified track.

Z Specify the track to be deleted. .........................................................

Press the TRACK or button to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the track to be deleted.

Only tracks containing data can be se- lected.

Other Record Edit Functions

1 6

6

169CVP-109/107/105/700

X Execute the Delete operation. ..........................................................

Press the DELETE button. When the Are You Sure? message is displayed, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel.

The DELETE function will be replaced by the UNDO function af- ter the Delete operation is executed. If the result is not what you ex- pected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track.

To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete func- tion.

A bar graph indicating the progress of the Track Delete operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stop- ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.)

The Undo function cannot be used once youve selected another track or exited from this mode.

The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 174).

Track Quantize (TRACK EDIT page 3) You can tighten up the timing of a recorded part by aligning all

notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example, you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolu- tion.

Only tracks containing data can be se- lected.

X Specify the quantize size. ................................................................

Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired quantize size as shown below.

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

3

3

3

Z Specify the track to be quantized................................................

Use the TRACK or button to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the track to be quantized.

Other Record Edit Functions

1 6

7

170 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Execute the Quantize operation. ......................................................

Press the QUANTIZE button. When the Are you sure? mes- sage is displayed, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation or NO button to cancel.

The QUANTIZE function will be replaced by the UNDO function after the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized track to what it was before performing the Quantize operation.

To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize func- tion.

Only the note data and voice data are quantized.

A bar graph indicating the progress of the Quantize operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/ STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.)

The Undo function cannot be used once youve selected another track or quantize size, or exited from this mode.

The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 174).

The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of each track or the initial data set for the entire song after youve finished recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the INI- TIAL EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display. All sixteen tracks are displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such as vol- ume, voices and reverb depth can be changed.

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)

Any voice changes entered in the middle of the original song will be erased when the voice parameter is changed in the Initial Edit mode.

When editing some types of data, it will not be possible to change certain parameters (indicated as Fixed) or change the voices for tracks other than tracks 1 and 2.

The following parameters can be changed in the INITIAL EDIT dis- play. Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter.

Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit:

When track 1 16 is selected:

VOLUME (See page 37.)

VOICE (See page 31.)

PAN (See page 37.)

REVERB DEPTH (See page 50.)

CHORUS DEPTH (See page 53.)

EFFECT DEPTH (See page 57 or 60.)

When TTL (Total) is selected:

TEMPO (See page 27.)

Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 49.)

REVERB TYPE (See page 49.)

CHORUS TYPE (See page 52.)

EFFECT TYPE (CVP-105) (See page 59.)

EFFECT1 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)

EFFECT2 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)

The Program Change Number (PRG#), Bank LSB (BNK LSB), and Bank MSB (BNK MSB) parameters, which are used to select voices via MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is selected.

On the CVP-109, the REVERB TYPE setting can be used to select a normal reverb type, but not a Natural Reverb type.

On the CVP-109/107/700, each of the two effect systems can be applied to a single track only. When you select the EFFECT1 TYPE setting or the EF- FECT2 TYPE setting, the number of the affected track is displayed along with the effect type. When you select the EFFECT DEPTH setting, the number of the effect system applied to the selected track is displayed along with the effect depth value. (The EF- FECT DEPTH setting is only available for the two tracks to which an effect system has been applied.)

1 6

8

Other Record Edit Functions

CVP-109/107/700

171CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Select the track to be edited. ............................................................

Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing the TRACK < or > button. If TTL (Total) is selected, any changes will affect the entire song rather than an individual track.

X Select the parameters to be changed. ....................................

Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT or button.

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display

C Change the settings. ..................................................................................

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to change the settings. You can instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be changed during playback.

If [TTL] is selected and the value of the reverb depth is changed, the new setting will also affect the keyboard sound.

The voices of the tracks to which Auto Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Harmony data have been recorded, can also be changed.

The data may not be played back accu- rately if you use the [REW] button while editing the data.

V Write the changes. .......................................................................................

When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press the WRITE button. When the Are you sure? message is dis- played, press the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or NO to cancel.

When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the edited track to what it was before you made any edits.

All edited data for any number of tracks within a single song can be written in a one-time Write operation, by pressing the WRITE button.

You can check whether the results of the Initial Edit operation are what you ex- pected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.)

The Undo function cannot be used once youve changed the setting, changed a different setting, or exited from the Initial Edit mode.

The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 174).

1 6

9

Other Record Edit Functions

The current parameter value for the selected track.

The parameter to be changed.

The selected track is highlighted.

CVP-109/107/700

CVP-109/107/700

172 CVP-109/107/105/700

B Exit the Initial Edit function. ..................................................................

To do this, press the [REC] button.

The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is com- pleted.

You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT] button.

If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to disk, a Write edited data? message will be displayed. Press YES to write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit with- out writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode and continue editing.

The Setup Memory function lets you save the current panel settings to disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back the song being edited.

Z Set up the Clavinova to play the song. ......................................

Setup Memory

For details regarding which settings are saved by the Setup Memory func- tion, see the Parameter Chart on page 13 of the Reference Booklet.

The settings saved by the Setup Memory function will be deleted if you re-record the song data or use Initial Edit function (page 171) to edit the initial parameter settings.

Change the Clavinovas functions to the settings you want it to use when playing back the song youre editing.

X Select the Setup Memory function.................................................

Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT 2 display (page 4 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the SETUP MEMORY button.

The Save panel settings to disk? message is displayed.

Press YES to save the current panel setup, or CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display.

The Clavinova displays the Dont remove the disk! mes- sage and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then displays a Completed! message before it returns to the RECORD EDIT 2 page.

1 7

0

Other Record Edit Functions

173CVP-109/107/105/700

The Vocal Harmony Memory function lets you save the current Vo- cal Harmony function settings to disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back the song being edited.

Z Set up the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................

Vocal Harmony Memory (CVP-109/107/700)

For a list of the Vocal Harmony param- eters saved by this function, see page 14 in the Reference Booklet.

To create Vocal Harmony data using the Vocoder mode (page 185), it is neces- sary to create a harmony track and set other parameters before selecting the Vocal Harmony Memory function. See Adding Vocal Harmony Data to a Song on page 184 for detailed instructions.

Set the Vocal Harmony function to the settings you want to use when you play back the song youre editing. See Chapter 8 for details regarding the Vocal Harmony function.

X Select the Vocal Harmony Memory function. ..................

Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT 2 display (page 4 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the V.HRMNY MEMORY button.

The Save Vocal Harmony settings to disk? message is displayed.

Press YES to save the Vocal Harmony settings, or CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display.

The Clavinova displays the Dont remove the disk! mes- sage and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then dis- plays a Completed! message before it returns to the RECORD EDIT 2 page.

1 7

1

Other Record Edit Functions

Enter the Song Record mode first! Since the Vocal Harmony function settings may change if you enter the Song Record mode after completing step 1, it is best to enter the Song Record mode before you begin this procedure.

174 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova has about 26 KB of internal memory that you can use to record a limited amount of song data approximately 2,500 notes, if no other data is recorded without using a floppy disk.

About the CVP MEMORY Song

Chord Sequence data (page 141) cannot be recorded to internal memory.

The Step Edit (page 146), Song Name (page 166), Setup Memory (page 172), and Vocal Harmony Memory (page 173) functions cannot be used when editing a song recorded to the internal memory.

You can use the Track Edit (page 167) and Initial Edit (page 170) functions to edit a song in the internal memory.

SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back the CVP MEMORY song.

When you enter the Song Play mode after recording a song in the memory, the SONG function displays the letters CVP in place of a song number. You can play this song back as you would any other song that was recorded to disk (see page 113).

If you insert a song disk and select a song number when the internal memory contains song data, a Delete CVP MEMORY? message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the song data from the internal memory. The song data will also be erased from the internal memory by turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded data, use the Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the recorded data to disk.

1 7

2

Recording Without a Disk

If you enter the Song Record mode without inserting a disk, the words CVP MEMORY will appear in the SONG display as shown be- low, and the Quick Recording, Track Recording and Punch-in/out Re- cording functions will become available.

Song data recorded to internal memory will be deleted when you load a style file. In this case, no message is displayed.

175CVP-109/107/105/700

The Vocal Harmony function of the CVP-109/107/700 can auto- matically produce up to two harmony vocals based on a single lead vocal. There are 42 different vocal harmony types, providing a variety of different harmonization effects. Vocal Harmony can also alter the pitch and timbre of the singers voice, effectively changing his or her apparent gender so that a male vocalist can sing along with a two-part female vocal backup, for example.

CHAPTER 8: Vocal Harmony

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VOCAL HARMONY

Z Connect the microphone. .........................................................................

In order to use the Vocal Harmony function, you must connect a mi- crophone to the [MIC.] jack on the CVP-109/107/700. See page 213 for detailed instructions regarding the use of a microphone.

Using Vocal Harmony

X Turn on the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................

Press the [VOCAL HARMONY] button.

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

The lamp lights.

PHONESMIC. VOL. MIN MAX

MIC.

MIC/LINE

1 7

3

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

176 CVP-109/107/105/700

C Sing along with the Clavinova. ..........................................................

Vocal Harmony Samples You can try out the Vocal Harmony feature as you play back 3. Lyric Demo (Beautiful Dreamer) in the Demo mode (page 14) and O Come All Ye Faithful on the Music Data Collection Disk that came with your Clavinova.

Start playing the keyboard, or play back a song in Song mode (see page 113), and sing along with the Clavinova. The vocal harmony effect will be added to your voice.

Depending on the selected vocal harmony type, you may also have to turn on the Auto Accompaniment as you play or play the keyboard along with the song data to produce an appropriate harmony. (See The Vocal Harmony Modes on page 185 for details.)

To Get Good Results The Vocal Harmony function may have diffi- culty providing clean harmonies if the micro- phone is picking up sounds other than the voice of a single lead vocalist. Here are some tips that will help you get the best results: Use a unidirectional microphone, if possible. Dont double up on the microphone. Position your mouth as close as you can to

the microphone. If the microphone seems to be picking up

the Clavinova, lower the [MASTER VOL- UME] and [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] con- trols slightly.

If the [OVER] lamp lights, adjust the micro- phone volume down slightly (see page 214).

V Turn off the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................

Press the [VOCAL HARMONY] button again when youre done using the Vocal Harmony function.

The lamp goes out.

You can change the vocal harmony type being used, as well as several other parameters related to the Vocal Harmony function, using the VO- CAL HARMONY display pages.

Displaying the Vocal Harmony Settings....................................

To display the Vocal Harmony settings, press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by [VOCAL HARMONY].

Changing the Vocal Harmony Settings

The most recently used VOCAL HARMONY page is displayed.

EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

DEMO

HELP

VOCAL HARMONY

The VOCAL HARMONY display consists of three pages, numbered 1 through 3. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between pages.

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

1 7

4

177CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Vocal Harmony Type .................................................

Vocal Harmony Type Settings: See table on page 13 in the

Reference Booklet. Basic setting: MenChoir

You can change the vocal harmony type selection in page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display. Use the HARMONY TYPE and buttons to select a vocal harmony type, or highlight the HARMONY TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected vocal harmony type is highlighted.

You can also use the left and right LCD buttons while any of the VO- CAL HARMONY pages are showing to select one of the vocal harmony types listed in the display.

To return the vocal harmony type to its basic setting (MenChoir), press either the HARMONY TYPE and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously.

Setting the Vocal Harmony Reverb Depth ............................... REVERB Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 64

When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies a reverb effect selected by the REVERB TYPE setting in the REVERB display (page 49) to the lead and harmony vocals. You can change the amount of reverb that is applied to the vocal parts using the REVERB function in page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

To set the depth of the reverb effect, select the REVERB function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] keys to change the value.

The REVERB value changes. When Vocal Harmony Is Off Reverb is also applied to the microphone signal when the Vocal Harmony function is turned off.

The [REVERB] button setting does not affect the reverb that is applied to vocals. To turn this reverb off, set the reverb depth to 0.

You can also advance the value by holding down the REVERB button. To reset the value to its basic setting of 64, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

1 7

5

Although the vocal harmony type is set automatically when you select a song that contains Vocal Harmony data for playback, it is possible to change the vocal harmony type as explained here. If you do so, theVocal Harmony data in the song will be ignored. (Once you have changed the vocal harmony type, you can recall the original Vocal Harmony data by simply selecting the same song again.)

178 CVP-109/107/105/700

Setting the Vocal Harmony Chorus Depth ..............................

CHORUS Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 0

When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies a cho- rus effect selected by the CHORUS TYPE setting in the CHORUS display (page 52) to the lead and harmony vocals. You can change the amount of chorus that is applied to the vocal parts using the CHORUS function in page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

To set the depth of the chorus effect, select the CHORUS function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] keys to change the value.

The CHORUS value changes.

You can also advance the value by holding down the CHORUS but- ton. To reset the value to its basic setting of 0, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

Setting the Vocal Harmony Balance ..............................................

BALANCE Range: 0 127 Basic setting: Depends on vocal har-

mony type.

You can set the balance between the lead and harmony vocal parts using the BALANCE function on page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display. Raising this value increases the volume of the vocal harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. If it is set to the maximum value of 127, you will hear only the vocal harmony from the Clavinovas speak- ers; if it is set to 0, only the lead vocal will be heard.

Select the BALANCE function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] keys to change the value.

The BALANCE value changes.

You can also advance the value by holding down the CHORUS but- ton. To reset the value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

Because the basic setting of the BALANCE function depends on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting (page 177).

1 7

6

When Vocal Harmony Is Off Chorus is also applied to the microphone signal when the Vocal Harmony function is turned off.

The [CHORUS] button setting does not affect the chorus effect that is applied to vocals. To turn this chorus off, set the chorus depth to 0.

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

179CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Vocal Harmony Effect Type ...............................

EFFECT TYPE Range: See table on page 219. Basic setting: KARAOKE1

When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies an effect to the lead and harmony vocal parts. This effect is separate from the effects selected in the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 displays (page 55). You can select the type of effect that is applied using the EFFECT TYPE function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

Use the EFFECT TYPE and buttons to select a different effect type, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected effect type is displayed.

To return the effect type to its basic setting (KARAOKE1), press ei- ther the EFFECT TYPE and buttons or the [] and [+] buttons si- multaneously.

Setting the Vocal Harmony Effect Depth ..................................

EFFECT Range: 0 (no effect) 127 (max.) Basic setting: 50

The EFFECT function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display lets you set the depth of the effect selected by the EFFECT TYPE func- tion in the same display page. To adjust the effect depth, select the EF- FECT function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] keys to change the value.

The EFFECT value changes.

You can also advance the value by holding down the EFFECT button. To reset the value to its basic setting of 50, simultaneously press the [] and [+] buttons.

1 7

7

When Vocal Harmony Is Off The selected effect is also applied to the microphone signal when the Vocal Har- mony function is turned off.

The [EFFECT] button setting does not affect the effect that is applied to vocals. To turn this effect off, set the effect depth to 0.

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

180 CVP-109/107/105/700

Correcting the Pitch of the Lead Vocal .......................................

Changing the Singers Apparent Gender .................................

PITCH CORRECT Settings: OFF, ON Basic setting: Depends on vocal har-

mony type.

When the GENDER TYPE function (page 181) is set to a value other than OFF, the Vocal Harmony function can correct slight inaccuracies in the pitch of the lead vocal. The pitch correction feature is enabled using the PITCH CORRECT function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

To turn pitch correction on or off, press the PITCH CORRECT button. No pitch correction is performed when the GENDER TYPE function is set to OFF, regardless of the PITCH COR- RECT setting.

The setting switches between ON and OFF each time you press the button.

Because the basic setting of the PITCH CORRECT function depends on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE set- ting (page 177).

Playing a Clavinova Voice with Your Voice ............................

PITCH TO NOTE Settings: OFF (vocals only),

R1 (main voice), R2 (second voice), LEFT (left voice)

Basic setting: Depends on vocal har- mony type.

The Vocal Harmony function can also cause the Clavinova to play one of the keyboard voices when you sing into the microphone. The Clavinova automatically plays notes at the pitch you sing, using the voice selected for the keyboard part you specify using the PITCH TO NOTE function on page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

Press the PITCH TO NOTE button to select a keyboard part.

The setting changes each time you press the button.

Because the basic setting of the PITCH TO NOTE function depends on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE set- ting (page 177).

GENDER TYPE Settings: OFF, UNISON, MALE, FE-

MALE Basic setting: Depends on vocal har-

mony type.

Although many of the vocal harmony types change the pitch and tim- bre of the singers voice to produce harmonizing vocals with a different apparent gender, the Vocal Harmony function can also change the appar- ent gender of the lead vocalist. This is accomplished by the GENDER TYPE function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

1 7

8

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

181CVP-109/107/105/700

Changing the Harmony Mode ...............................................................

HARMONY MODE Settings: AUTO, CHORDAL,

VOCODER Basic setting: AUTO

The majority of the Clavinovas vocal harmony types can produce har- mony notes using one of two vocal harmony modes: Chordal or Vocoder. These modes differ mainly in the way performance data is used to produce harmonies (see The Vocal Harmony Modes on page 185 for details). You can use the HARMONY MODE function on page 3 of the VOCAL HAR- MONY display to select one of these modes, or instruct the Clavinova to select a mode automatically based on the current panel settings.

Press the HARMONY MODE button to select AUTO, CHORDAL, or VOCODER as the harmony mode.

Gender Type Description

UNISON Produces an effect between those produced by the MALE and FEMALE settings.

MALE Adjusts the pitch and timbre of the singers voice to sound more masculine.

FEMALE Adjusts the pitch and timbre of the singers voice to sound more feminine.

The HARMONY MODE value may change automatically to either CHORDAL or VOCODER, depending on the current performance method, if the HARMONY PART function (page 182) is set to a value other than the basic value.

The HARMONY MODE function is not available when the current vocal har- mony type uses either Chromatic mode or Detune mode as the vocal harmony mode (page 185). In such cases, a row of dashes (- - -) is dis- played in place of the HARMONY MODE value.

Use the GENDER TYPE and buttons to select a gender type, or highlight the GENDER TYPE function and use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons.

The selected gender type is displayed. When GENDER TYPE is set to any value other than OFF, the Vocal Harmony function will produce only one harmony note.

Because the basic setting of the GENDER TYPE function depends on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting (page 177).

The setting changes each time you press the button.

1 7

9

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

182 CVP-109/107/105/700

If AUTO is selected as the harmony mode, the Clavinova will produce harmony notes in either Vocoder or Chordal mode, based on the most appropriate harmony part. The harmony part is selected automatically according to the current performance method, as shown below:

If you select CHORDAL or VOCODER, the Clavinova will produce harmony notes in the selected mode, based on the harmony part specified by the HARMONY PART function.

Harmony Part (See below.)

R1

LEFT

ACMP

XF

As per Vocal Harmony data

Performance Method

Playing keyboard in Single mode (page 31) or Dual mode (page 38)

Playing keyboard in Split mode (page 41)

Playing Auto Accompaniment (page 69)

Playing back Acmp Assist data (page 81) or song with Auto Accompaniment data (page 133)

Playing back song with Vocal Harmony data

Harmony Mode (See page 181.)

Vocoder

Chordal

Chordal

Chordal

As per Vocal Harmony data

HARMONY PART Settings: R1, LEFT, ACMP, 1 16,

XF, OFF Basic setting: Automatically set by

AUTO harmony mode, depending on perform- ance method (see table above).

Harmonies produced using the Chordal or Vocoder vocal harmony modes (page 181) can be based on different musical parts played or played back on the Clavinova. When AUTO is selected as the har- mony mode, the part used as the basis for the harmony is selected auto- matically according to the current performance method (see table above). You can instruct the Clavinova to base the harmony on a specific part by changing the HARMONY PART function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.

Press the HARMONY PART button to select the function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the value.

The selected value is displayed.

1 8

0

Changing the Harmony Part ...................................................................

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

183CVP-109/107/105/700

The HARMONY PART value may change automatically if the HARMONY MODE function is set to AUTO and the performance method is changed (see page 181).

The HARMONY PART function is not available when the current vocal har- mony type uses either Chromatic mode or Detune mode as the vocal harmony mode (page 185). In such cases, a row of dashes (- - -) is dis- played in place of the HARMONY PART value.

You can also cycle through the values by holding down the HAR- MONY PART button.

LOCK Settings: OFF, ON Basic setting: OFF

The current Vocal Harmony settings may be altered if you play back a song that contains Vocal Harmony data, if you select a registered panel setup (page 109), or if the Clavinova receives MIDI messages that specify different Vocal Harmony settings. If you wish, you can use the LOCK function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display to prevent the Vocal Harmony settings from changing in such circumstances.

Press the LOCK button to lock or unlock the current Vocal Harmony settings.

The setting switches between ON and OFF each time you press the button.

You can also use the Registration Freeze function to prevent the Vocal Harmony settings from being changed when a registration is selected.

Select ON if you want to protect the current the Vocal Harmony set- tings.

Harmony is based on: Part

R1 LEFT ACMP 1 16 XF

(Chordal mode) (Vocoder Mode)

No harmony Main keyboard part Left keyboard part in Split mode

Auto Accompaniment chords No harmony Specified song track

No harmonyVocal Harmony data in XF/XG file

1 8

1

Locking the Vocal Harmony Settings ............................................

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

184 CVP-109/107/105/700

Once you have set up the Vocal Harmony function according to your preferences, you may want to save those settings for future use, or in- clude them as part of a song that you will want to sing along with later.

Registering Vocal Harmony Data ......................................................

You can use the Registration function (page 108) to save your Vocal Harmony settings as part of a registered keyboard setup.

Using Vocal Harmony Data

Saving Vocal Harmony Data ...................................................................

You can use the SAVE operation in the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display to save a registration file containing Vocal Harmony settings that were registered as described above, or to save your Vocal Harmony settings to disk (along with all your other current panel settings) as part of an All Setup file (see page 192).

The Registration file or All Setup file can be loaded later using the LOAD operation in the same display page.

Adding Vocal Harmony Data to a Song ......................................

You can use the V.HRMNY MEMORY function in the RECORD EDIT 2 display (page 173) to record your vocal harmony settings to disk as part of a song that youre editing in the Song Record mode.

If you want a song to include automatic Vocoder mode harmonies, set up the song as follows:

1. Record the harmony notes in one of the songs tracks. 2. Select VOCODER as the harmony mode (page 181). 3. Set the track number from step 1 as the harmony part (page 182).

Once youve completed these steps, you can use the V.HRMNY MEMORY function to save the Vocal Harmony data.

The LOCK setting in page 3 of the VO- CAL HARMONY display is not saved by this function.

1 8

2

1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

If you dont want Clavinova to play the notes from the harmony track during song playback, set the track volume to 0 using the Initial Edit function (page 171).

185CVP-109/107/105/700

The Vocal Harmony Modes The vocal harmony mode determines how the Vocal Harmony function applies harmony notes

to the lead vocal. Refer to the list of vocal harmony types on page 13 of the Reference Booklet to determine which vocal harmony mode is used by a given vocal harmony type.

Chordal Mode When a vocal harmony type uses the Chordal mode, the pitch of the harmony notes is automati-

cally determined by the Auto Accompaniment chords or the chord data in an XF song.

Vocoder Mode When a vocal harmony type uses the Vocoder mode, the pitch of the harmony notes is di-

rectly controlled by notes played on the keyboard or included in a specified song track.

Chromatic Mode A vocal harmony type that uses the Chromatic mode always produces notes at a fixed inter-

val from the lead vocal.

Detune Mode A vocal harmony type that uses the Detune mode adds notes that are detuned by a specific

amount, thus adding a chorus effect to the lead voice.

The vocal harmony settings that you save as part of a song will be recalled automatically when you select that song for playback. (You can override the Vocal Harmony data in the song by changing the settings in the VOCAL HARMONY display before you begin playback, however.)

1 8

3

Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)

186 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Function mode provides various advanced functions that, for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations. These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova to your own musical needs and preferences.

CHAPTER 9: The Utility Functions

Group Display Function Page

KEYBOARD

1 Tune 188

Transpose 188

2 Key Touch & Fixed Velocity 189

Voice Setting 189

PEDAL 3 Left Pedal & Glide Range 190

Right Pedal & Bend Range (CVP-109/107/700) 191

DISK

4 Registration, Setup & Acmp Assist Files 192

5 Song Copy & Disk Copy 196

6 Song Delete 198

7 Song Data Transform 199

8 Disk Format 200

MIDI

9

Send Channel (Keyboard) 201

Local Control 201

Synchronization 202

10 MIDI Filter 202

11 Receive Filter 203

12

MIDI Transpose 204

Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) 205

Song Transmission 205

Remote Keyboard 205

BACKUP 13 Backup 206

14 Recall 207

UTILITY

15 Micro Tuning 208

16 Scale Tuning 209

17 Video Out (CVP-109/107/700) 212

VOLUME

STYLE

START/STOPAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL MASTER VOLUME

ACMP/SONG VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO

SWING/ JAZZ LATIN

TRAD/ WALTZ

BALL ROOM

16BEAT8BEAT DANCE ROCK/

R&BBALLAD PIANIST

HELP

MAIN BMAIN A MAIN C MAIN D ENDING SYNCHRO START/STOP AUTO FILL

ACMP ASSIST HARMONY

COUNTRY DISK

TAP

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

VOCAL HARMONY

MUSIC DATABASE

ACMP ON INTRO

MIN EXIT DIRECT ACCESS

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR SYNTHE-

SIZER ORGAN

XGENSEMBLE PER-

CUSSIONBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB CHORUS EFFECT

SAX / FLUTE

DISK IN USE

STRINGS/ CHOIRFUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT

FF REC 1 2 3 4 BANK

BANK REGISTRATION

PLAY/ STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING FADE

IN/OUT

OVER

SIGNAL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

FUNCTION

The following functions are available:

1 8

4

Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the display during operation. Refer to the Messages section (page 221) for information on the messages.

187CVP-109/107/105/700

Using the Utility Functions .......................................................................

As the table on the preceding page shows, the utility functions are divided among 17 display pages (16 pages on the CVP-105). Use the following procedure to display the page containing a desired function.

Z Press the [FUNCTION] button. MIXER FUNCTION

MASTER EQUALIZERSONG

X Display the desired group. If you prefer, you can skip to step 3 and select a page directly using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

The upper half of the Function mode display contains a list of the function groups. As a shortcut, you can use the left and right LCD buttons to display the function group containing the function you want to set.

The most recently used display page within the selected group is displayed.

C Display the desired page.

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display the page that contains the function you want to set.

You can also exit the Function mode by pressing the [EXIT] button. The [FUNCTION] lamp goes out.

The lamp lights and the most recently used page of the Function mode display appears.

1 8

5

V Perform the desired operation.

Refer to Chapter 2 Basic Operation for instructions regarding the selection and use of the various types of functions.

B Press the [FUNCTION] button when finished.

188 CVP-109/107/105/700

Tune ....................................................................................................................................

Keyboard

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display page 1

TUNE Range: 414.8 Hz 466.6 Hz

(102.1 +101.62 cents) Basic setting: 440 Hz

The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allow- ing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed by the TUNE function. The tuning can be adjusted up or down a maximum of approximately 26 Hz (slightly over 100 cents) in 0.2-Hz steps. Hz and Cents

Pitch is measured in units of Hertz (abbreviated Hz), which represents the number of times the sound wave vi- brates in a second.

A cent is a unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit voices.

The XG Master Tune setting is effec- tive when playing back songs contain- ing XG Master Tune data.

Transpose ....................................................................................................................

TRANSPOSE functions Range: 24 +24 semitones

(2 +2 octaves) Basic setting: 0

The Transpose functions make it possible to shift the pitch of the key- board or song data in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of the Clavinova to the range of other instruments or singers.

The Clavinova has two transpose functions: ALL and SONG. The former transposes all notes played by the Clavinova, whereas the latter transposes song data only. When you change the setting of the ALL func- tion, the SONG setting is also adjusted by the same amount.

The Transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit voices.

When playing back songs containing XG Transpose data, the XG Transpose data is effective only for the data play- back sound. The value set on the panel affects the keyboard sound.

The values set here affect playback data transmitted via MIDI.

When a Transpose function is set to a high value, notes played in the corre- sponding range at the upper end of the keyboard (e.g., C5 through C7 for a value of +24) may not sound as ex- pected. The same is true of notes at the lower end of the keyboard when a low Transpose value is set.

1 8

6

189CVP-109/107/105/700

KEY TOUCH Settings: See table at left. Basic setting: NORMAL

FIXED VELOCITY Range: 1 127 Basic setting: 76

Key Touch & Fixed Velocity ......................................................................

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display page 2

Velocity The amount of force applied to a key is

frequently referred to in this manual as velocity. This is because the Clavinova determines the amount of force that was applied to a key by measuring the speed with which the key was de- pressed.

This function does not affect the actual weight of the keys.

The Key Touch function determines how velocity affects the volume of the voices played by the Clavinovas keyboard. Select from four Key Touch settings to tailor the keyboard response to the selected voice, type of song, or your personal playing style. Press the KEY TOUCH button to change the setting. The data dial and [] and [+] buttons cannot be used.

Key Touch Settings

NORMAL This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the basic setting.

SOFT This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when playing the keys softly.

FIXED This setting produces a uniform degree of loudness, no matter how forcefully or softly you play the keys. Use the FIXED VELOCITY function to set the loudness of notes produced by the keyboard.

HARD This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to produce maximum loudness

Voice Setting ............................................................................................................. VOICE SETTING Settings: AUTO, MANUAL Basic Setting: AUTOThis function determines whether the basic reverb, chorus, effect, and

other settings for each voice are automatically selected when a voice is selected. Press the VOICE SETTING button to change the setting. When it is set to AUTO, the basic settings for each voice are automatically se- lected when the voice is selected; when it is set to MANUAL, the set- tings do not change when voices are selected.

The following settings are automatically selected when VOICE SETTING is set to AUTO: Function Page Reverb ON/OFF 46 Natural Reverb type (CVP-109) 48 Reverb system (CVP-109) 48 Reverb depth settings 49 Chorus ON/OFF 51 Chorus depth settings 53 Effect ON/OFF 54 or 58 EFFECT TYPE 56 or 59 Effect DEPTH 57 or 60 Effect VARIATION 56 or 60 HARMONY TYPE 88 Harmony SPEED 89 Harmony VOLUME 89 OCTAVE settings 37, 39, 43 RIGHT PEDAL function (CVP-109/107/700) 191

BEND RANGE setting (CVP-109/107/700) 191

Keyboard

1 8

7

190 CVP-109/107/105/700

Left Pedal & Glide Range...........................................................................

Pedal

FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display page 3

LEFT PEDAL Settings: See table at left. Basic setting: SOFT

This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of various functions.

LEFT PEDAL Settings

Setting Description

SOFT The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting). (See page 45.)

DAMPER The left pedal functions as a switched damper pedal (see the description of the SW.DAMPER setting of the RIGHT PEDAL function on page 191). This setting is useful when you set the right pedal to control pitch bends.

START/STOP The left pedal functions as the [START/STOP] button. (See page 64.)

HARMONY When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is applied only while the left pedal is held down. (See page 87.)

REGISTRATION The panel settings registered to the next Registration number are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed. (See page 109.)

REG.FREEZE The left pedal switches the Registration Freeze function on and off; that is, it performs the same function as the FREEZE button in the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display (page 111).

ENDING/RIT The left pedal functions as the [ENDING] button. You can have the song end ritardando (slow down gradually) by press- ing the left pedal twice in succession. (See page 67.)

BREAK

Pressing the left pedal during style playback produces a break in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as the pedal is held. When the pedal is released, normal playback resumes from the next measure. If you press the left pedal a second time within one measure, normal playback resumes immedi- ately.

BREAK FIL

Pressing the left pedal during style playback causes the Clavinova to play a special break fill-in pattern. This pattern is different from the fill-in patterns produced by the Auto Fill function. (See page 63.)

BASS HOLD While the left pedal is pressed, the bass note played by the Auto Accompaniment will be held even if the chord is changed. This function does not work when FULL KEY- BOARD is selected as the accompaniment mode (page 73).

FADE IN/OUT The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE IN/ OUT] button. (See pages 67 and 68.)

EFF1 VARI This function switches the effect variation on or off for effect system 1; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIA- TION button in the EFFECT 1 display (page 56).

EFF2 VARI This function switches the effect variation on or off for effect system 2; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIA- TION button in the EFFECT 2 display (page 56).

EFFECT VARI This function switches the effect variation on or off; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the EFFECT display (page 60).

If the left pedal is set to REGISTRATION, the setting of the left pedal function in Registration memory is not recalled.

1 8

8

(CVP-109/107/700)

(CVP-109/107/700)

(CVP-105)

(CVP-109/107/700)

191CVP-109/107/105/700

Right Pedal & Bend Range (CVP-109/107/700) ...................

RIGHT PEDAL Settings: See table at left. Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

This function lets you set the right pedal of the CVP-109/107/700 to one of two damper modes, or to control upward and downward pitch bends.

RIGHT PEDAL Settings

Setting Description

CONT.DAMPER The right pedal functions like a standard damper pedal. The sustain length is increased by degrees depending on how far the pedal is pressed.

SW.DAMPER The right pedal functions as a damper on/off switch. The sustain length increases when the pedal is pressed, and returns to normal when it is let up.

BEND UP Pressing the right pedal bends the pitch upward to the maximum amount specified by the BEND RANGE func- tion.

BEND DOWN Pressing the right pedal bends the pitch downward to the maximum amount specified by the BEND RANGE func- tion.

CVP-105 Damper The right pedal on the CVP-105 functions as a damper on/off switch (see the de- scription of the SW.DAMPER setting in the table at left).

BEND RANGE Settings: 1 12 (semitones) Basic setting: Depends on main voice. The GLIDE RANGE function may be

displayed in place of the BEND RANGE function when the LEFT PEDAL function is set to one of the GLIDE settings. To display the BEND RANGE function, press the RIGHT PEDAL button and select BEND UP or BEND DOWN, if necessary.

Pedal

CVP-109/107/700

Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to rise an amount specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se- lected setting).

Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to drop an amount specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se- lected setting).

1 8

9

Setting Description

GLIDE UP S

GLIDE UP M

GLIDE UP F

GLIDE DOWN S

GLIDE DOWN M

GLIDE DOWN F

GLIDE RANGE Settings: 1 12 (semitones) Basic setting: 1 On the CVP-109/107/700, the BEND

RANGE function may be displayed in place of the GLIDE RANGE function when the RIGHT PEDAL function is set to BEND UP or BEND DOWN. To display the GLIDE RANGE function, press the LEFT PEDAL button and select one of the GLIDE settings, if necessary.

LEFT PEDAL Settings (continued)

Because the basic settings of the Right Pedal and Bend Range func- tions depend on the current voice selection, the settings of these func- tions may change automatically when a different voice is selected. (The Bend Range value will change automatically only if BEND UP or BEND DOWN is specified as the Right Pedal basic setting for the selected voice.)

192 CVP-109/107/105/700

Registration, Setup & Acmp Assist Files ..................................

You can use the functions on this page to load, save, delete, and re- name data files containing registration data (page 108), panel setup data, or Accompaniment Assistance data (page 81).

Before executing one of these functions, make sure that the disk you want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive.

Disk

FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display page 4

Z Select the file type.

Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file type to be loaded, saved, deleted or named.

REGISTRATION

A Registration file may contain the data for just one registration, or a full set of twenty. Refer to page 13 in the Reference Booklet for a list of settings registered by the Registration function.

ALL SETUP An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the list on page 13 in the Reference Booklet.

ACMP ASSIST An Acmp Assist file contains a set of Accompaniment Assistance data (see page 81).

If you select REGISTRATION as the file type, you can also use the REGIST function to specify whether the operation will affect one memory location or a full set of twenty.

1 9

0

193CVP-109/107/105/700

When saving registration data, the REGIST setting specifies which memory location(s) will be saved to disk. When loading data, the REGIST setting specifies how the registration data will be loaded, as shown below:

You can delete or rename any registra- tion file on the disk, regardless of the REGIST setting.

X Select the file operation. File operations cannot be performed while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to perform a file function.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

The file operation begins.

The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation youve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each op- eration below.

LOAD ............................................................................................................................

When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The original internal data will be replaced when you execute the Load opera- tion. Be sure to save all important data to disk (see page 194) before us- ing the Load operation.

Disk

REGIST setting:

File contains: ALL A1 E4

All registrations All registrations are loaded.

Only registration saved from specified location is re- loaded (to original location).

One registration

Selected registration file is loaded into original location.

Selected registration file is loaded into specified loca- tion.

1 9

1

194 CVP-109/107/105/700

First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button to load the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Load opera- tion.

SAVE .................................................................................................................................

When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to be saved will appear.

Press the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor, and select the character position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve characters.)

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to highlight the characters to be input.

Press the CHAR SET button to input the selected characters at the current underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor to other characters or marks and entering them in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display, press the CANCEL button.

When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.

If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a Same name! Overwrite? message will appear. Press the OK button to overwrite the original file with the new file, or CANCEL to cancel the Save operation.

Disk

1 9

2

195CVP-109/107/105/700

DELETE .........................................................................................................................

When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear.

First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button to delete the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Delete operation.

NAME ...............................................................................................................................

When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear.

First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the same way as described above for the Save function.

Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly entered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a Same name! Overwrite? message will appear. In this case, press the OK button to overwrite the original file with the renamed file, or CAN- CEL to abort the Name operation.

Disk

1 9

3

196 CVP-109/107/105/700

Song Copy & Disk Copy ..............................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display page 5

The Song Copy and Disk Copy functions cannot be executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode before attempting to copy a song or disk.

The functions on this page allow you to copy song data recorded by the Clavinova to a different song number on the same disk, or to a differ- ent disk. You can also use the Disk Copy function to copy an entire disk.

You will not be able to select DISK1 1 as the copy function if the disk you inserted is write protected (page 9).

If the Clavinovas memory contains song data recorded without a disk (page 174), CVP DISK will automati- cally be selected as the copy function. If you want to keep the CVP MEMORY song data, you can use this function to copy it to a disk. (Insert the disk, specify a destination song number as described in step 3, then execute the copy function as usual.) You can then use the Song Delete function (page 198) to delete the CVP MEMORY song. Once the song has been de- leted, you will be able to use the other copy functions.

First insert the disk containing the source song, or the disk to be cop- ied.

Press either of the leftmost two LCD buttons to select the copy type. Three copy types are available.

Z Select a copy function.

X Select the source song.

If you selected DISK1 1 or DISK1 2 in step 1, press the SONG button, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select a song number from 1 to 99.

DISK1 1 This function allows you to copy a song to a different song number on the same disk.

DISK1 2 This function allows you to copy a song to a different disk.

DISK COPY This function copies all the data from one disk to an- other disk. (All data on the destination disk is erased by this process.)

The number and name of the selected song are displayed above the third and fourth LCD buttons.

Disk

1 9

4

197CVP-109/107/105/700

C Select the destination song number.

If you selected DISK1 1 as in step 1, press the SONG button, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be se- lected.)

If the destination song number already contains data, the name of the song file will appear in the middle section of the display. In this case, the original data of the destination song number will be re- placed by the source song data when you execute the copy opera- tion.

V Execute the copy operation. The copy operation cannot be executed if the same song number is selected as both the source song and the destination song for the DISK1 1 function. In this case, a Select a different number! message will appear.

Press the COPY button.

The copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk, an Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button to continue or the NO button to cancel.

If you are copying the data to a different disk (or copying an entire disk), a Number of disk exchanges(**) message appears to indicate the number of times the disk will have to be changed. Press the OK button to continue, or the CANCEL button to abort the operation.

When copying data between disks, follow the instructions in the dis- play, inserting the source and destination disks as required.

If you are using the DISK1 2 function to copy a song to another disk, the Select destination song number message will appear the first time you insert the destination disk. Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.)

If the destination song number already contains data, the song name will appear in the display. In this case, the original data of the destination song number will be replaced by the source song data. Press the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort.

Copying Commercial Software Copying of commercially available

software is strictly prohibited, except for your personal use.

Some commercially available software is purposely copy-protected, and can- not be copied using these functions.

Data files (other than those made with the CVP-109/107/105/700/103) that have been copied once cannot be copied a second time to another disk. Also, addi- tional data can be recorded only to the right-hand/left-hand parts of the copied DOC files.

Disk

1 9

5

198 CVP-109/107/105/700

Song Delete ...............................................................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display page 6

The Song Delete function cannot be executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode before at- tempting to delete a song.

You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the delete op- eration is performed, it cannot be undone.

Z Insert the disk.

Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk drive.

X Select the song to be deleted.

Use the SONG and buttons, the data dial, or the [] and [+] but- tons to select the song to be deleted. The song data in the Clavinovas memory can be also deleted with this operation. To do this, select CVP MEMORY instead of a song number (CVP MEMORY appears only when the memory contains song data).

C Execute the delete operation.

Press the DELETE button.

An Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press the YES button to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to can- cel the operation.

Disk

1 9

6

199CVP-109/107/105/700

Song Data Transform.......................................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display page 7

The Song Data Transform function can- not be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to transform song data.

This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP-109/ 107/105/700 for playback on other Clavinova models or a Disklavier.

Z Insert the disk. 2DD Disks Only! Only data saved on 2DD disks can be converted. To transform song data that has been saved on a 2HD disk or re- corded in the Clavinovas memory, use the Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the song to a 2DD disk before you attempt to convert it.

Insert a 2DD disk containing the data to be converted in the disk drive.

X Select a data format.

Data Format Compatibility CVP-series Clavinovas other than the models listed in the table at left can play back song data recorded on the CVP- 109/107/105/700 without conversion. If you are planning to use your song data on other instruments and want to ensure that they will closely reproduce the sound you achieved on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700, however, we recommend using XG voices (see page 32) for all tracks other than those that play piano voices.

Use either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the target format of the file (the type of instrument that will use the converted data). The following three types are available:

CVP PERFORMANCE This function converts data for playback on the CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, the DOM- 30, and the DOU-10.

PIANO FORMAT 1 This function converts data for playback on all Disklavier models except the MX100A and the MX100B.

PIANO FORMAT 2 This type converts the data for playback on the Disklavier MX100A or MX100B.

C Select the song to be converted.

Use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the song number of the song to be converted.

The number and name of the selected song are displayed above the SONG function.

V Press the TRANSFORM button. The converted data is saved to a song

number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 are not used.)

The original data remains intact at the original song number even after the conversion has been executed.

Recording or editing cannot be per- formed on the converted songs.

An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button to convert the selected song, or NO to cancel the operation. When the conversion process is finished, a Completed! SONG No.** message indicates the song number to which the data was saved.

If CVP PERFORMANCE was selected in Step 2, the characters C) are appended to the beginning of the original name. If one of the other formats was selected, the characters P) are appended.

Disk

1 9

7

200 CVP-109/107/105/700

Disk Format ..............................................................................................................

Floppy disks must be correctly formatted before the Clavinova can use them for data storage. If you insert a new, unformatted disk (or a disk that has already been initialized in a different format) in the disk drive, the Clavinova will automatically ask you whether it should format the disk. (See page 131 for details.)

The Clavinova also has a Disk Format function that can be used to reformat disks that have already been formatted for use by the Clavinova. The reformatting operation deletes any data that may have been saved on the disk.

Z Insert the disk to be formatted.

Make sure that the disks write protect tab is set to the write posi- tion, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter forward until it clicks into place.

FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display page 8

The Disk Format function cannot be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to format a disk.

X Execute the format operation.

Press the START button.

An Are you sure? message is displayed. Press YES to execute the format, or NO to cancel.

A bar graph indicates the progress of the formatting process. Once the disk has been formatted, the Clavinova can use it to store songs and other data.

Disk

1 9

8

CAUTION

Formatting a disk erases all the data on the disk. Before you format a disk, make sure it doesnt contain any data that you want to keep.

Format Types 2DD disks are formatted to hold 720 KB of data; 2HD disks are formatted to hold 1.44 MB of data.

201CVP-109/107/105/700

Send Channel (Keyboard) .........................................................................

MIDI

FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display page 9

SEND CH Settings: OFF, 1 16 Basic setting: See table at left.

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels (1 through 16) of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. The SEND CH function lets you set the MIDI transmit channels for the keyboard parts.

Part Explanation Basic Setting

LEFT Left voice in Split mode (see page 41) 3

RIGHT1 Main voice 1

RIGHT2 Second voice in Dual mode (see page 38) 2

You can set each keyboard part to transmit on a separate channel. If you set a part to OFF, the MIDI data for that part will not be transmitted.

MIDI Reception The Clavinova always receives MIDI data in the Multi Timbre mode. This is a mode in which the

Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the Clavinova by using a computer or MIDI sequencer.

Local Control ..........................................................................................................

LOCAL Settings: ON, OFF Basic setting: ON

The term local control refers to the control of the internal tone gen- erator by the keyboard. You will normally play the Clavinova with the Local Control function set to ON.

Turning off the local control separates the keyboard from the tone generator, so that the Clavinova will not output any sound when you play the keyboard. Since keyboard performance data is still output via the MIDI jacks, however, you can use this setting when you want to play an external MIDI tone generator from the Clavinovas keyboard without sounding the internal voices.

To turn the local control on or off, press the LOCAL button. The data dial and [] and [+] buttons cannot be used.

1 9

9

202 CVP-109/107/105/700

Synchronization....................................................................................................

MIDI

SYNC. Settings: INT. (internal clock),

EXT. (external clock) Basic setting: INT.

The playback tempo of a song or style is normally controlled by the Clavinovas internal clock. When you want the Clavinovas playback tempo to be controlled by an external sequencer or rhythm machine, you should set the synchronization function to use an external clock. You might use this function, for example, to play the Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova in perfect synchronization with an external sequencer.

To switch the synchronization from an internal clock to an external clock (or vice versa), press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [] and [+] buttons cannot be used.

MIDI Filter .................................................................................................................

The FUNCTION [MIDI 2] display contains MIDI filter settings that can be used to enable or prevent the transmission and reception of certain types of MIDI data.

FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display page 10

Program Change Messages PROGRAM Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF Basic setting: Tx&Rx

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change num- bers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For example, the Clavinova can change voices in response to MIDI program change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices of con- nected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program change messages transmitted from the Clavinova. (Program change messages are transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the Clavinova.)

Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this fea- ture is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set the PROGRAM function to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of program change messages.

Bank MSB and LSB messages can be transmitted and received even when PROGRAM is set to OFF.

2 0

0

203CVP-109/107/105/700

Control Change Messages CONTROL Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF Basic setting: Tx&Rx

Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard perform- ance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For ex- ample, the Clavinova can respond to control change messages transmit- ted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be con- trolled by sending control change messages from the Clavinova to that device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating the damper pedal, etc., on the Clavinova.)

Set CONTROL to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of control change messages.

The control change data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in de- tail on page 17 in the Reference Booklet.

System Exclusive Messages SYS EX. Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF Basic setting: Tx&Rx

System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturers devices.

Set SYS EX. to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of sys- tem exclusive messages.

The system exclusive data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in detail on page 19 in the Reference Booklet.

Start/Stop Commands START/STOP Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF Basic setting: OFF

A device that transmits the Start/Stop command can start and stop the rhythm or sequence data performance of a receiving device via MIDI. For example, you can transmit the Start/Stop command from an external MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or song play- back on the Clavinova. Also, an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm ma- chine can be started and stopped by starting and stopping the Auto Ac- companiment on the Clavinova.

Set START/STOP to ON to enable the transmission and reception of Start/Stop commands.

FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display page 11

Receive Filter ...........................................................................................................

RECEIVE FILTER Settings: ON, OFF (x 16) Basic setting: ON (x 16)

The Receive Filter function lets you prevent the Clavinova from re- ceiving channel-specific MIDI messages such as note data and control changes on certain MIDI channels.

This function is useful, for example, when you want to control some of the Clavinovas voices exclusively from an external sequencer, and others using only the Clavinovas keyboard or its built-in Auto Accompaniment and Song mode functions. (You can also have the Clavinova ignore chan- nels carrying messages that are intended for another instrument connected to the Clavinovas MIDI [THRU] terminal.)

By default, the Clavinova will receive messages on all 16 channels. Use the following procedure to enable or disable the reception of a channel:

MIDI

2 0

1

204 CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Select the channel.

Use the CHANNEL < and > LCD buttons to select the number of the channel you want to enable or disable.

An underline cursor is displayed below the selected channel number.

X Press the rightmost LCD button.

When the selected channel is enabled, ON is highlighted and the channel number is enclosed in a solid box. When it is disabled, OFF is highlighted, and the channel number is ghosted.

MIDI TRANSPOSE Settings: ON (enabled),

OFF (disabled) Basic setting: ON

The MIDI Transpose function determines whether the Transpose set- ting in the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] display (page 188) will affect the MIDI data received by the Clavinova.

The Clavinova will normally transpose the data it receives. Press the MIDI TRANSPOSE button to switch this function on or off.

MIDI Transpose ......................................................................................................

FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display page 12

MIDI

2 0

2

205CVP-109/107/105/700

Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) ............................

SEND CH (ACMP&RHY) Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

916 (transmitted) Basic setting: OFF SEND CH (HARMONY) Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

68 (transmitted) Basic setting: OFF

When the ACMP&RHY function is set to 916, the performance data for the rhythm and accompaniment parts is transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 9 through 16.

If the HARMONY function is set to 68, the notes added by the har- mony types listed below are transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 6 through 8.

When transmitting rhythm, accompani- ment, or harmony part data via MIDI, do not select the MIDI channels used by these parts as the send channels (page 201) used to transmit the data for your keyboard performance. Doing so may result in your keyboard per- formance data being mixed with the Auto Accompaniment or Harmony data.

If ACMP&RHY or HARMONY is turned on, the data for the corresponding part(s) will be transmitted via MIDI, even if the RIGHT1 send channel (page 201) has been turned off.

Song Transmission ............................................................................................

SONG Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

ON (transmitted) Basic setting: OFF

When the SONG function is set to ON, the Clavinova will transmit song data via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Select this setting when you want an external tone generator to sound in response to song data played back by the Clavinova.

The transmission of song data is turned off by default.

Remote Keyboard ...............................................................................................

REMOTE KBD Settings: OFF (not received),

1 16 (receive channel) Basic setting: OFF

MIDI data received over the channel set with the REMOTE KBD function will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affect- ing your keyboard performance. The following data types can be re- ceived:

MIDI data received by the remote key- board function cannot be output via the MIDI [OUT] terminal.

MIDI

2 0

3

Harmony types transmitted on channels 6 through 8:

Echo Tremolo Trill Strumming Add Jazz Gtr Add Brass Add Strings In The Forest

* See page 87 for details on the Harmony function.

Notes added by other harmony types are always transmitted on the RIGHT1 channel (page 201), regardless of this setting.

The rhythm, accompaniment, and harmony parts can be recorded by a computer or external sequencer when these functions are turned on.

Key ON/OFF Control Change (performance data; only those listed below)

#1 Modulation #7 Volume #11 Expression #64 Sustain Pedal #66 Sostenuto Pedal #67 Soft Pedal #123 All notes off

#0 BANK Select MSB* #32 BANK Select LSB* #6 Data Entry MSB

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range) #96 Data Increment

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range) #97 Data Decrement

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range) #100 RPN LSB

(Pitch Bend Range only) #101 RPN MSB

(Pitch Bend Range only)

Program Change (voice change data)* Pitch Bend

Note: Items marked with an asterisk are used to change the main voice.

206 CVP-109/107/105/700

Backup ............................................................................................................................

Backup

FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display page 13

Backup functions Settings: ON, OFF Basic settings: ON (REGISTRATION)

OFF (all other groups)

This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off.

Press the or button or use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the desired group, then use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected group to backup on/off. The (*) mark at the beginning of the group name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on. The settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to the basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off.

Backup is used for the following groups on the Clavinova.

Group Description

VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings

REV/CHO/EFF Reverb, chorus, and effect settings

TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning

PEDAL Pedal function settings

ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings

SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode

REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings

MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings

VOCAL HARMONY Vocal Harmony settings (CVP-109/107/700)

Permanent Settings The following settings are always backed up: Help language Song volume Video Out settings (CVP-109/107/700) Backup ON/OFF

Refer to page 13 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific parameters in each group.

Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main- tained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.

2 0

4

207CVP-109/107/105/700

Recall ................................................................................................................................

This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic settings) for a group of parameters, or for all parameters at once.

Press the or buttons or use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the group you want to recall, then press the START button.

FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display page 14

An Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press the YES button to recall, or NO to cancel.

The following parameter groups of the Clavinova can be recalled.

Group Description

VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings

REV/CHO/EFF Reverb, chorus, and effect settings

TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning

PEDAL Pedal function settings

ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings

SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode

REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings

MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings

VOCAL HARMONY Vocal Harmony settings (CVP-109/107/700)

ALL All of the above settings

Permanent Settings The factory settings of the following parameters are not recalled: Help language Song volume Video Out settings (CVP-109/107/700) Backup ON/OFF However, these and all other settings can be reset to the initial factory values by turning the power on while holding down the rightmost key on the keyboard (C7). When this is done, the Back up data erased and replaced by factory data message appears to indicate that all backed up data has been erased and the factory settings have been recalled. After this message is displayed for a few sec- onds, the main display will appear.

Refer to page 13 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific parameters in each group.

Backup

2 0

5

208 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and loaded whenever necessary. The currently loaded custom tuning can be turned on or off at any time by using the leftmost LCD button in this display.

Utility

FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display page 15

Micro Tuning Setup............................................................................................

Z Select a key.

Press the key to be tuned.

The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key will appear in the display.

X Set the tuning. TUNE Range: 100 cent +100 cent

1 +1 semitone Basic Value: 0 cent (all keys)

Press the TUNE or buttons or use the data dial or [] and [+] to tune the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the leftmost LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in or- der to check the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of 0 cents for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously pressing both the TUNE and buttons.

C Repeat steps 1 and 2.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned.

Micro Tuning Files ..............................................................................................

The custom tuning can be named and saved to disk as a tuning file. Tuning files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are no longer needed.

Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.

Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or rename a tuning file, the inserted disk should contain the file in ques- tion.

2 0

6

209CVP-109/107/105/700

X Select the desired file operation.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the selected file operation appears. The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 193 through 195. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file operation.

This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament) configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tun- ing can be saved to disk for future recall.

Preset Scale ..............................................................................................................

This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or temperaments.

Until equal temperament the most commonly used tuning at present was accepted, various tunings have been created over the years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better feeling for the music of the corresponding eras.

The Clavinova contains the following seven temperaments:

LOAD See page 193.

SAVE See page 194.

DELETE See page 195.

NAME See page 195.

FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display page 16

EQUAL PURE(MAJOR) PURE(MINOR) MEANTONE

PYTHAGOREAN WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER

Utility

2 0

7

The Scale Tuning function does not affect the pitch of song data played back by the Clavinova.

210 CVP-109/107/105/700

Z Select PRESET with the leftmost LCD button.

The following display appears:

X Select a scale.

Press the SCALE or to highlight the parameter, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the temperament type. When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) temperament, the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set. This allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key.

C Select the central key. KEY Settings: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab,

A, Bb, B Basic setting: C

Press the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data dial or [] and [+] buttons to select the central key.

User Scale Setup .................................................................................................

This function allows you to individually tune each key within an oc- tave. The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same key in all other octaves.

Z Select USER with the leftmost LCD button.

The following display appears:

X Press the key to be tuned.

The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key appears.

Utility

2 0

8

211CVP-109/107/105/700

C Set the tuning.

LOAD See page 193.

SAVE See page 194.

DELETE See page 195.

NAME See page 195.

TUNE Range: -64 cent +63 cent Basic Value: 0 (all keys)

Set the pitch by pressing the TUNE or buttons, or by using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to check the sound during this operation. The default tuning of 0 cents can be instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously press- ing the TUNE and buttons.

V Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.

User Scale Files ...................................................................................................

The custom scale can be named and saved to disk as a user scale file. User scale files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are no longer needed.

Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.

Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or rename a user scale file, the inserted disk should contain the file in question.

X Select the desired file operation.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the selected file operation appears. The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 193 through 195. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file operation.

Utility

2 0

9

212 CVP-109/107/105/700

Character Size ........................................................................................................

The functions on this page let you set the display characteristics for the lyrics and chords (page 129) that are output to a television or video monitor connected to the Clavinovas [VIDEO OUT] jack (page 215). You can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as well as the color of the display background.

FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] Display page 17 (CVP-109/107/700)

SIZE Settings: LARGE, SMALL Basic setting: LARGE

The large character display may not fit on some television screens. In such cases, use the SMALL setting.

When the SMALL setting is used, the widths of horizontal lines may appear to vary on certain television screens.

Press the leftmost LCD button to set the size of the characters dis- played on the monitor screen.

The SIZE function setting switches between LARGE and SMALL each time you press the button.

CHARACTER Range: 1 (black) 27 (white) Basic setting: 19 (blue) Character colors may appear uneven or blurred on certain television screens.

The characters displayed on the video screen can be set to any of a variety of colors. Press one of the CHARACTER or buttons to se- lect that function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the setting.

Each value from 1 to 27 selects a different character color.

To return the character color to its basic setting of 19, press either the [] and [+] buttons or the CHARACTER and buttons simultane- ously.

Background Color ..............................................................................................

BACKGROUND Settings: WHITE, BLUE, BLACK,

GREEN Basic setting: WHITE

You can set the background to one of four colors: white, blue, black, or green. Press one of the BACKGROUND or buttons to select that function, then use the data dial or the [] and [+] buttons to change the setting.

To return the background color to its basic setting of WHITE, press either the [] and [+] buttons or the BACKGROUND and buttons simultaneously.

Utility

CVP-109/107/700

2 1

0

Character Color .....................................................................................................

213CVP-109/107/105/700

The Clavinova is equipped with jacks that let you connect a variety of audio devices. You can connect headphones, a stereo system, or PA equipment for audio output, as well as input from a tone generator or other instrument. The CVP-109/107/700 also has microphone and video jacks that further expand the Clavinovas potential for musical fun.

Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting audio equipment, as fail- ing to do so can result in damage to speakers and other problems.

CHAPTER 10: Connections Audio and Video Connections

Recommended Headphones: Yamaha HPE-160 headphones

Headphones

To use headphones, connect them to one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located below the left end of the key- board. The Clavinovas built-in speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of head- phones are connected. Two people can enjoy listening to the Clavinova together by connect- ing two pairs of headphones to the two jacks.

You can connect a microphone to the CVP-109/107/700 to enjoy singing along as you perform or play back song data. The Clavinova can even add automatic harmonies and other effects to your vocals when you use the Vocal Harmony function (page 175). The Clavinova will output your vocals through the built-in speakers or [PHONES] jacks, as well as the AUX OUT jacks.

Microphone (CVP-109/107/700)

PHONESMIC. VOL. MIN MAX

MIC.

MIC/LINE

CVP-109/107/700

Z Connect the microphone. ........................................................................

Use a unidirectional microphone for best results.

Connect your microphone to the [MIC.] jack (standard 1/4" phone jack) located below the left end of the keyboard.

PHONESMIC. VOL. MIN MAX

MIC.

MIC/LINE

2 1

1

CAUTION

214 CVP-109/107/105/700

You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the left end of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or rear panel (CVP-105).

AUX IN Jacks...........................................................................................................

X Set the input level. ...........................................................................................

You should set the [MIC/LINE] switch to the LINE position when connecting an audio source with line-level output to the [MIC.] jack.

Set the [MIC/LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC.] jack) to the MIC position.

MIC/LINE

C Adjust the microphone volume. .......................................................

Use the [MIC. VOL.] knob (located next to the [MIC.] jack) to set the microphone volume, then trying singing into the microphone. The vol- ume should be set high enough that the [SIGNAL] lamp on the front panel lights steadily when you sing, but not so high that the [OVER] lamp lights. (These two lamps can be found at the left end of the panel, next to the [VOCAL HARMONY] button.)

Audio Input and Output

CAUTION

Never connect the Clavinovas AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either directly or via external audio equip- ment. Such connections could result in a feedback loop that will make nor- mal performance impossible, and may even damage the Clavinova.

The volume of the audio signal input at the AUX IN jacks is affected by the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

The sounds of other instruments or tone generator modules can be output through the speaker system of the Clavinova by connecting audio cables to the AUX IN jacks as shown here.

Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack for monophonic input. For stereo input, con- nect the left channel output to the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack, and the right channel output to the AUX IN [R] jack.

Tone Generator

R AUX IN

L/L+R

Audio and Video Connections

MIC/LINE

2 1

2

The Vocal Harmony function (page 175) may not work properly if the [OVER] lamp lights during microphone use.

215CVP-109/107/105/700

AUX OUT Jacks ....................................................................................................

By connecting audio cables to the AUX OUT jacks as shown here, you can output the sound of the Clavinova to a stereo system, amplifier, mixing console, or recording equipment. Since the AUX OUT jacks provide output at a fixed level, you will need to use the controls on the connected equipment to adjust the overall volume of the sound from the Clavinova.

Use the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack for monophonic output. For stereo output, connect the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack to the left channel input, and the AUX OUT [R] jack to the right channel input.

You can connect an optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller to the [EXP. PEDAL] jack, located at the left on the underside of the unit, to control the vol- ume of your keyboard performance with your foot.

Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700)

Stereo System

R AUX OUT

L/L+R

EXP. PEDAL

Audio and Video Connections

You can connect the Clavinova to a television or video monitor to display the lyrics and chords in your song data on a larger screen.

Connect one end of a video cable to the [VIDEO OUT] jack (standard pin jack), which is located at the left on the underside of the unit, and the other end to the video input jack on your television or video monitor. Make sure the [VIDEO SELECT] switch is set to the position (PAL or NTSC) that matches the standard used by your video equip- ment.

You can set the Clavinovas video display characteristics using the settings in the FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] dis- play (page 212).

Video Monitor (CVP-109/107/700)

Television

VIDEO OUT

2 1

3

Use an audio-video cable with good high- frequency characteristics and RCA-type pin jacks to connect the Clavinova to a television or video monitor.

216 CVP-109/107/105/700

Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI terminals on the Clavinova to other MIDI devices. The Clavinovas MIDI terminals are located at the left of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or rear panel (CVP-105).

Tone generators or other devices to be controlled by the Clavinova can be connected to the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Devices that will control the Clavinova should be connected to the MIDI [IN] terminal. If you have a personal computer or sequencer that will control the Clavinova, you may want to connect it to both the [IN] and [OUT] terminals to allow two-way communication. In this case, any other instruments to be controlled by the same device can be connected to the Clavinovas MIDI [THRU] terminal.

When you use the MIDI terminals, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the MIDI position. The MIDI terminals will not transmit or receive data if this switch is set to any other position.

You can set the Clavinovas MIDI parameters using pages 9 through 12 of the FUNCTION display (see page 201 through 204).

You can use the MIDI terminals to connect your Clavinova to a wide range of MIDI devices, including personal computers, sequencers, tone generators, and so on. In addition, the Clavinova features a [TO HOST] connector that lets you connect it directly to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT, or other compatible personal computer without the use of a special MIDI interface.

Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting computers or MIDI equipment, as failing to do so can result in damage to equipment.

Connecting MIDI Equipment

Tone Generator MIDI Sequencer

INOUTTHRU MIDI

[TO HOST] or MIDI? If you simply want to connect your

Clavinova to a personal computer, it may be more convenient to use the [TO HOST] terminal, as your computer wont need a special MIDI interface to make that connection.

The MIDI terminals are particularly convenient when you want the Clavinova to function as part of a more extensive MIDI setup.

You can connect the Clavinova to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT, or compatible personal computer using the [TO HOST] connector, which is located at the left of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or rear panel (CVP-105). If you do, be sure to set the adjacent [HOST SE- LECT] switch to the appropriate setting for your computer model.

Connecting to a Host Computer

Turn off both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting the cable.

When the Clavinova is connected to a host computer, turn on the computer first, then the Clavinova.

Disconnect the cable when not using the [TO HOST] terminal. If it is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.

HOST SELECT

MIDIMac PC-2PC-1

Data Connections

2 1

4

CAUTION

217CVP-109/107/105/700

Data Connections

Connecting to an Apple Macintosh or Compatible Com- puter................................................................................................................................................

Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer port on your Macintosh (whichever port your MIDI software is using for MIDI data communication) using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the Mac position.

You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owners manual). In any case, the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz.

2 (HSK i)1 1 (HSK 0)2 5 (RxD-)3

MINI DIN 8-PIN

4 GND4 3 (TxD-)5 8 (RxD+)6 7 (GP i)7 6 (TxD+)8

MINI DIN 8-PIN

Mac Cable Connections

8-pin system peripheral cable Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps

Apple Macintosh compatible computer

Set to the Mac position.

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac PC-2PC-1

Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ................................ If your system doesnt work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual: if it requires a 31,250 bps data transfer rate, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to PC-1.

Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN 9-pin D-SUB cross cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the PC-2 position.

Refer to your software owners manual for information on any settings you might have to make on the computer side.

8 (CTS)1 7 (RST)2 2 (RxD)3

4 5 (GND) 8

3 (TxD) 5

MINI DIN 8-PIN

D-SUB 9-PIN

PC-2 Cable Connections

8-pin mini DIN 9-pin D-SUB cable

Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps

IBM-PC/AT compatible computer

Set to the PC-2 position.

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac PC-2PC-1

MIDI Driver The Music Software Collection disk that came with your Clavinova

contains special MIDI driver software intended for use with the Win- dows 95 and Windows 98 operating systems. This driver software may be necessary when using computer software with the Clavinova. Install the MIDI driver from the disk to your computer if necessary. Refer to the text files on the disks (listed below) for installation instructions.

A:\driver\readme_e.txt

A:\driver\licensee.txt

A: is the name of the floppy disk drive.

Connector Pin Numbers

1 3 4 6 7 8

5 2

D-SUB 9-PIN

MINI DIN 8-PIN

5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

2 1

5

218 CVP-109/107/105/700

APPENDICES

Effect Type Lists

2 1

6

The tables in this appendix contain descriptions of the various reverb, chorus, and effect types that are available for use on the CVP-109/107/105/700.

XG REVERB, XG CHORUS, and XG EFFECT (all abbreviated as XG in the main display) appear as the selected type when a style uses a special reverb, chorus, or effect setting that is not available as a regular selection. These settings cannot be selected from the corresponding menu displays; they disappear as soon as you select a different reverb, chorus, or effect type.

Natural Reverb Type List (CVP-109)

Type Description

MEDIUM HALL

CONCERT HALL High-quality hall reverb effects

CATHEDRAL

WOOD ROOM High-quality room reverb effects

STUDIO ROOM

Reverb Type List

Type Description

HALL1

Concert hall reverb effects HALL2

HALL3

HALL4

ROOM1

Small room reverb effects ROOM2

ROOM3

ROOM4

STAGE1 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument

STAGE2

PLATE1 Simulated steel plate reverb effects

PLATE2

XG REVERB Special reverb setting. See note, above.

219CVP-109/107/105/700

Effect Type Lists

2 1

7

Chorus Type List

Type Description

CHORUS1

CHORUS2

CHORUS3

CHORUS4

CHORUS5

FLANGER1

FLANGER2

FLANGER3

FLANGER4

XG CHORUS Special chorus setting. See note, above.

Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness to the sound

Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and landing

Effect Type List

Type Description 109/107/700 105

HALL1

HALL2

HALL3

HALL4

ROOM1

ROOM2

ROOM3

ROOM4

STAGE1

STAGE2

PLATE1

PLATE2

EARLY REF1

EARLY REF2

GATE REVERB Simulation of a gated reverb

REVERSE GATE Simulation of a gated reverb played back in reverse

KARAOKE1

KARAOKE2

KARAOKE3

CHORUS1

CHORUS2

CHORUS3

CHORUS4

CHORUS5

Concert hall reverb effects

Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness to the sound

Echo effects suitable for vocals

Early reflection components of the reverb effect

Simulated steel plate reverb effects

Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument

Small room reverb effects

220 CVP-109/107/105/700

2 1

8

Effect Type List

Type Description 109/107/700 105

FLANGER1

FLANGER2

FLANGER3

FLANGER4

SYMPHONIC

SYMPHONIC1

SYMPHONIC2

PHASER Modulation effect created by cyclical phase shifting

ROTARY SP1

ROTARY SP2

ROTARY SP3

ROTARY SP4

ROTARY SP5

TREMOLO1

TREMOLO2

GTR TREMOLO Tremolo effect that is suitable for guitar sounds

AUTO PAN

AUTO PAN1

AUTO PAN2

AUTO WAH

AUTO WAH1

AUTO WAH2

TCH WAH1

TCH WAH2

DELAY LCR Three delay sounds: L (left), R (right), and C (center)

DELAY LR L and R delays with two feedback delays

ECHO L and R delays with independent feedback for L and R

CROSS DELAY Two delays (L and R) with crossed feedback

AMP SIM Effect that simulates a guitar amp

DIST HARD

DIST SOFT

EQ DISCO Disco-oriented equalizer effect

EQ TEL Equalizer effect that simulates sound heard over the phone

XG EFFECT Special effect setting. See note, above. NA NA

Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and landing

Multi-stage versions of the modulation provided by a celeste-type effect

Modulation effects that simulate rotary speakers

Velocity-triggered wah effects; useful for electric guitar sounds, etc.

Cyclical volume modulation effects

Effects that cyclically move the sound from right to left and front to back

Cyclical wah effects; useful for electric guitar sounds, etc.

Effect Type Lists

Effects that add distortion with an edge to the sound; useful for electric guitar sounds, etc.

221CVP-109/107/105/7002 1

9

Messages

General (Panel Operation)

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as selection of a style or Music Database setup) that cannot be performed during playback.

Stop song playback, or exit the Song Play mode, then perform the operation again.

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as copying or deletion of song data) that cannot be performed in the Song Record mode.

Stop recording, or exit the Song Record mode, then perform the operation again.

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as the selection of a style, etc.) that cannot be performed during Accompaniment Assistance playback, or an operation (such as selection of a Guide Control function, etc.) that cannot be performed while editing Accompaniment Assistance data.

Turn the Accompaniment Assistance function off, then perform the operation again.

A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed.

General (Direct Access)

This prompt appears when you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 22).

Press the panel button that corresponds to the settings you want to display. (Be sure to press the second button while this message is showing.)

This message appears if you press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by a panel button that does not correspond to a Direct Access display. (See page 22.)

Press [DIRECT ACCESS] again, then press a panel button that corresponds to a Direct Access display.

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as song data conver- sion) that cannot be performed during recording or playback.

Stop song recording or playback, or exit the Song Record or Song Play mode, then perform the operation again.

General (Disk-related)

This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive.

Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again.

This prompt appears when you attempt to rename or convert a song that doesnt contain any data.

Select a song that contains data, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk drive.

This message appears when you attempt to load, rename, or delete a file, and no file of the specified type can be found on the disk in the disk drive.

Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file.

This message appears if you try to save Accompaniment Assistance data to disk (page 86) when no Accompaniment Assistance data has been recorded. It also appears if you try to save a custom style to disk (page 101), but have selected a memory number that doesnt contain any style data.

Create some Accompaniment Assistance data or a custom style, or select a memory number that contains custom style data.

222 CVP-109/107/105/700

An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk.

Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

This message appears when a new or improperly formatted disk has been inserted into the disk drive. (See page 131.)

Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the formatting process.

This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations using a disk whose write-protect tab is in the protect position.

Set the write-protect tab to the write-enable position (page 132), then try the opera- tion again. If the operation still cannot be performed, the disk itself has internal write protection, making it impossible to perform recording or file operations on the disk.

This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations on song files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the song file type, operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be possible using the CVP-109/107/105/700.

This appears for a few seconds when a time-consuming operation such as Format, Song Copy, etc., is finished.

This message is displayed while data is being transferred between the Clavinova and the disk.

The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished.

When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to confirm whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not.

Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display.

The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.

Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 198), or use a disk that has more available space. If this message appears during song recording, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved automatically.

This message appears when you try to create more files than the disk is capable of stor- ing. You can record up to 60 song files on a 2DD or 2HD disk. A 2DD disk can hold about 107 files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 219 files.

Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files from the disk (page 198), or use a disk that has more available space.

A file with the same name already exists.

Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or press CANCEL to abort the operation.

This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from the disk or saving data.

Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation again.

Messages

2 2

0

This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit the data of commercially available software or data recorded on instruments other than the CVP-109/107/105/700/ 103 or the CVP-94/92/98/96/600.

Press YES to convert the data for recording or editing on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700. Press NO if you don't want to convert the data. It may not be possible to record to tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 of songs con- verted in this manner.

223CVP-109/107/105/700

General (Memory-related)

This message appears when the Clavinovas memory has become full while recording a song in the internal memory (page 174). If this happens, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved automatically. This message is also displayed if the Clavinovas memory becomes full when recording data in a custom style (see page 103).

Messages

2 2

1

Custom Style Mode

This message appears while the Clavinova is storing the data of a song recorded to the internal memory after it has been edited using the Track Edit or Initial Edit functions.

Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation.

This message appears when you execute an operation, such as playback of disk software, that will cause the Clavinova to delete data recorded to the internal memory.

Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal memory, then perform the desired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data.

This message appears if you try to select one of the following functions while editing song data that has been recorded to the internal memory: Chord Sequence (page 141), Step Edit (page 146), Song Name (page 166), Setup Memory (page 172), or Vocal Harmony Memory (page 173).

Use the Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the song to a disk, delete the CVP MEMORY song (page 174), then perform the desired operation using the data on the disk.

This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged. (See page 92.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the time signature of the custom style. (See page 93.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures in a section of the custom style. (See page 94.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform an operation that can only be performed after the part has been deleted. (See page 95.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you store a custom style (page 98). It also ap- pears if you try to change styles before youve stored the custom style (page 104).

Select OK to store the custom style. Press CANCEL to return to the previous dis- play without storing data.

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit the Custom Style mode before storing the custom style. (See page 104.)

Select YES to store the custom style. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN- CEL to return to the previous display.

This message appears when the previous version of the custom style cannot be recalled because the time signature has been changed. (See page 99.)

If you attempt to save a custom style to disk before storing it in memory, this message prompts you to store the style before proceeding. (See page 102.)

224 CVP-109/107/105/700

Step Edit

This message appears if you try to record note data or perform a cut, copy, or paste opera- tion on the SYSTEM track (page 146) while editing a song with the Step Edit function.

Select a different track (1 through 16) and try the operation again.

Messages

2 2

2

This message appears if there is not enough internal memory capacity available to store the custom style. (See page 103.)

This message appears if the style selected for deletion in the display shown above is the source style on which the style currently being edited was based.

Press OK to return to the preceding display, and select a different style for deletion.

This message appears when DELETE is selected in the display shown above.

Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do not want to delete the style.

Style File Load

This message appears if you attempt to load a Style file when the memory capacity is not sufficient to hold the specified file. (See page 107.)

Some Style files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN function. (See page 106.)

Load the Style file, then use the normal playback methods to hear the style in question.

This message appears if you try to record an event (page 146) that either contains invalid data (e.g., a System Exclusive event that is not terminated by an F7) or is located at an inappropriate timing (e.g., a Time Signature event in the middle of a measure).

Check the parameter settings in the event against the MIDI Data Format (page 19 in the Reference Booklet), then record the event again.

Chord Sequence

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function while recording.

Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN- CEL to return to the Chord Sequence function without storing.

This message appears when you attempt to enter an accompaniment style or section change at a position other than the beginning of a measure while recording data with the Chord Sequence or Accompaniment Assistance functions.

Record the style or section change in question at the beginning of the measure. (See page 142.)

225CVP-109/107/105/700

This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Vocal Harmony Memory function of the CVP-109/107/700 (page 173) to save the current Vocal Harmony settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode.

Select YES to save the Vocal Harmony settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display without saving.

Song Copy & Disk Copy

This message appears before you start a Song Copy or Disk Copy operation to inform you of the number of times the disks must be exchanged. (See page 197.)

This message prompts you to insert the destination disk when copying data from one disk to another. (See page 197.)

This message appears when you try to copy data from a 2DD disk to a 2HD disk or vice versa using the Disk Copy function (page 196).

Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then perform the operation again from the beginning. Make sure the destination disk you insert is the same type (2DD or 2HD) as the source disk being copied.

This message appears if you insert the source disk when prompted to insert the destina- tion disk while using the Disk Copy function (page 197) to copy data from one disk to an- other.

Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful not to confuse the source and destination disks.

When you first insert the destination disk while copying a song from one disk to another disk, this message prompts you to specify the song number to which the song is to be copied. (See page 197.)

Messages

2 2

3

Other Record Edit

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without writing the data to disk.

Press YES to save the edited data. Press NO to exit without saving. Press CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit display without saving.

This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Setup Memory function (page 172) to save the current panel settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode.

Select YES to save the panel settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display without saving.

This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying data from one disk to another. (See page 197.)

This message is displayed if you insert a disk other than the specified disk (source or destination) when prompted to exchange disks while using the Disk Copy function (page 197) to copy data from one disk to another.

Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful to insert the correct disk as specified.

This message indicates that you have selected the same song number as both the source and the destination when copying a song within a disk. (See sidebar, page 197.)

Change the destination song number.

226 CVP-109/107/105/700

Song Data Conversion

This message appears if you attempt to convert song data that has been saved on a 2HD disk. (See page 199.)

Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the data conversion using the 2DD disk.

Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which the data was saved.

Hardware-related

This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active.

Turn off both the Clavinova and the host computer. Check the cable connection and the position of the HOST SELECT switch (page 216), then turn on the computer first, followed by the Clavinova.

The Clavinova will retain data protected by the Backup function (page 206) as long as it is used regularly. If the instrument is not turned on for a week or longer, however, the data may be lost. This message appears when the Clavinova is turned on after data has been lost. It also appears when you recall all factory data (page 207.)

Messages

2 2

4

227CVP-109/107/105/700

Problem

The Clavinova does not turn on.

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off.

Noise is heard from the Clavinovas speakers.

The display is too bright or too dark to read.

The keyboard volume is low com- pared to that of the Auto Accompa- niment or song playback.

The volume of the Auto Accompa- niment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard.

The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard.

The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed.

Style or song playback does not start.

When the keyboard is played, not all of the notes sound.

Solution

Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet.

This is normal, and is no cause for concern.

Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova.

Adjust the contrast of the display using the [CONTRAST] control. (See page 11.)

Increase the overall keyboard level in the main display (page 23), or use the VOLUME function in the appro- priate KEYBOARD display (pages 37, 39, or 42) to raise the volume of the keyboard part in question.

Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOL- UME] level.

Raise the part or track level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 77 or 120).

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.

Unplug the headphones.

Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 201.)

Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack. (See pages 48, 54 and 62 in the Reference booklet for the CVP-105, CVP-700 and CVP-109/107, respectively.)

Set the MIDI Sync function to INT. (See page 202.)

Since the configuration of the tone generation system is such that later notes have priority, previous notes may occasionally be cut off. (See Specifications on page 67 of the Reference Booklet for details about the simultaneous polyphonic capac- ity.)

Cause

The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly.

Electrical current is being applied to the instrument.

The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova.

The brightness may be affected by the surrounding temperature.

Either the overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part is set too low.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is set too low.

The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song tracks is set too low.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low.

Headphones are connected.

The Local Control function is turned off.

The pedal cord plug is not connected.

The MIDI Sync function is set to EXT.

The Clavinovas total simultaneous polyphonic capacity (maximum number of notes) has been exceeded.

Troubleshooting

2 2

5

228 CVP-109/107/105/700

The Auto Accompaniment does not play back.

The desired chord is not recognized or output by the Auto Accompani- ment.

The maximum of 60 songs cannot be recorded.

Some tracks do not play back when playing back data.

The Auto Accompaniment is not turned on.

The keys are not being played cor- rectly.

The keys are not being played ac- cording to the selected accompani- ment mode.

The memory capacity is full because the playing time of one or more songs is long, or many functions were used.

Playback of the track(s) is turned off.

Press the [ACMP ON] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment.

Refer to the Fingering Chart (page 15 of the Reference Booklet).

Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode. (See page 72.)

Delete unnecessary songs (page 198) or record to a new disk.

Turn on playback for the tracks that you want to hear. (See pages 117 and 120.)

Problem SolutionCause

Troubleshooting

2 2

6

229CVP-109/107/105/700

MIDI and Data Compatibility

MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide

standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data

differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You can check whether your instrument supports certain data types by referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owners manual for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for the CVP- 109/107/105/700 is found on page 38 in the Reference Booklet.

MIDI Terminals

Sequence Format The system which records song data is called sequence format. Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the

disk matches that of the MIDI device.

[Common Sequence Formats] SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most

commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with both Format

0 and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks).

Song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700 is auto- matically recorded as SMF Format 0.

ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with ESEQ.

Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called program numbers. The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the voice allocation format.

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allo- cation format of the song data matches that of the compat- ible MIDI device used for playback.

[Main Voice Allocation Formats] GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level

1, as is most commercially available software. The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with GM System

Level 1.

XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with XG. Song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700 using

voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.

DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instru- ments. This is also a common format used with various Yamaha soft- ware. The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with DOC.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depend- ing on the specifications of the devices and particular data re- cording methods.

MIDI Cable Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables. MIDI settings can be made in the MIDI pages of the Func-

tion mode display. (See pages 201 through 204.) Further information on MIDI and its applications is avail-

able in various music books and magazines.

Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility:

whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CVP-109/107/105/700, and whether or not the CVP-109/107/ 105/700 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Basic Check Points The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below.

Disk Format Sequence format Voice allocation format

Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called formatting. There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided,

double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems.

CVP-109/107/105/700 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks.

When formatted by the CVP-109/107/105/700, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to 1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures 720 KB and 1.44 MB indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk.

This terminal transmits the MIDI data.

This terminal receives the MIDI data.

INOUTTHRU

MIDI

Data received via the MIDI IN terminal is re- transmitted unchanged through this terminal.

2 2

7

230 CVP-109/107/105/700

Index

A Accompaniment Assistance ................. 8186 Accompaniment Mode ................... 69, 7173 Accompaniment Off Events ....................... 84 accompaniment styles ................ see styles Acmp Assist files .............................. 192195 aftertouch events ............................. 156157 All Setup files ................................... 192195 audio connections ............................ 213215 Auto Accompaniment ........................... 6990

B Backup ..................................................... 206 Balance, Vocal Harmony ......................... 178 basic settings ............................................. 19 beat ...................................................... 28, 93 Bend Range ............................................. 191 break .......................................................... 84

C Channel Aftertouch events ....................... 156 channels, MIDI ................................. 201, 205 Chord Assistance ................................. 7576 chord indication .................................... 7273 Chord Sequence .............................. 141145 chorus .................................................. 5153 chorus, Custom Style ....................... 100101 chorus, Song .................................... 120121 chorus, vocals .......................................... 178 Chorus Type List ...................................... 219 computer .......................................... 216217 contrast ...................................................... 11 Control Change events .................... 153154 controls ................................................ 1213 convert, song data ................................... 199 Custom Style ...................................... 91107 CVP MEMORY (song) ............................. 174

D damper pedal ............................. 45, 190191 data dial ..................................................... 17 deleting, Accompaniment Assistance ........ 85 deleting, Chord Sequence ....................... 144 deleting, data files .................................... 195 deleting, Style Files .................................. 102 deleting, tracks ................................. 168169 Demo Play ........................................... 1415 detune ........................................................ 40 Direct Access ............................................. 22 Disk Copy ......................................... 196197 disk drive ...................................................... 9 Disk Format ...................................... 131, 200 Disk functions ................................... 192200 display pages ............................................. 20 Dual ................................................ 3840, 44

E Easy Play ......................................... 125, 127 Effect Type List ................................ 219220 effects .................................................. 5460 effects, Custom Style ....................... 100101 effects, Song .................................... 120121 effects, vocals .......................................... 179 end mark .............................. 83, 85, 144, 145 ending pattern ...................................... 6768 Equalizer Lock ........................................... 26 event list, editing .............................. 158160 event list, filtering ..................................... 161 events, adding .......................................... 158 expression pedal ................................ 24, 215

F Fade In ....................................................... 67 Fade Out .................................................... 68 fast forward .............................................. 124 file icons ................................................... 114 fill-in patterns ........................................ 6364 filter, MIDI Filter ................................ 202204 fingering (chords) ..................... 7273, 7576 Fixed Velocity ........................................... 189 floppy disks .................................................. 9 formatting, Disk ................................ 131, 200 free tempo ................................................ 116 Function ........................................... 186187 function, resetting ....................................... 19 functions in normal rectangles ................... 21 functions in rounded rectangles ................. 16

G Glide Range ............................................. 190 Guide ......................................... 15, 125129 guide lamps .............................................. 129 Guide Mode ............................................. 128

H Harmony .............................................. 8789 Harmony Mode ........................ 181182, 185 Harmony Part ........................................... 182 headphones ............................................. 213 Help ...................................................... 2930 host computer .................................. 216217 highlighted items ........................................ 16

I Initial Edit ......................................... 170172 introduction pattern .................................... 66

K key cover .................................................... 10 Key Touch ................................................ 189 keyboard guide lamps .............................. 129 keyboard percussion .................................. 36

L LCD, changing a value ............................... 17 LCD, selecting a function ........................... 16 left LCD buttons ......................................... 18 Left Pedal ................................................. 190 left voice ............................................... 4144 lid ............................................................. 11 loading, data files ............................. 193194 loading, style files ............................. 105107 Local Control ............................................ 201 lyrics ................................................... 15, 129

M main display ............................................... 16 main voice ................................ 3637, 38, 42 Master Equalizer .................................. 2526 memory, recording to ............................... 174 menu display .............................................. 18 messages ......................................... 221228 messages, Custom Style ................. 103104 Meta events ............................................. 157 metronome ........................................... 2728 microphone ...................................... 213214 Micro Tuning .................................... 208209 MIDI equipment ........................................ 216 MIDI Filter ........................................ 202203 MIDI functions .................................. 201205 MIDI terminals .......................................... 216 MIDI Transpose ....................................... 204 Mixer, Auto Accompaniment ................ 7778 Mixer, Song ...................................... 120121 multi-track recording ........................ 135138 Music Database ................................... 7981 music stand ................................................ 10

N naming, Custom Style ................................ 97 naming, data files ..................................... 195 naming, Registration ........................ 111112 naming, Song ................................... 166167 Natural Reverb ........................................... 48 Natural Reverb Type List ......................... 218 Next Note ......................................... 125, 127 Note events ...................................... 152153 Note Record ..................................... 162164

O octave ............................................ 37, 39, 43 One Touch Setting ..................................... 90 Organ Flutes ........................................ 3335

P pages, display ............................................ 20 pan ................................................. 37, 40, 43 pan, Custom Style ............................ 100101 pan, Song ......................................... 120121 panel controls ....................................... 1213 part, recording ...................................... 9496 part, track assignment ...................... 118119 Part Cancel ...................................... 117118 part levels ....................... 7778, 84, 100101

2 2

8

231CVP-109/107/105/700

2 2

9

pause ....................................................... 124 Pedal functions ................................ 190191 pedals .................................................. 43, 45 Pianist styles ........................................ 61, 70 Piano Roll ................................. 126, 127, 129 pitch bend ................................................ 191 Pitch Bend events .................................... 155 playback, Auto Accompaniment ..... 70, 7273 playback, Custom Style ........................... 103 Playback, demo songs ......................... 1415 playback, Song ................................ 113124 playback, styles .................................... 6368 playback, style files .................................. 107 Polyphonic Aftertouch events .......... 156157 power ......................................................... 11 practicing .......................................... 125127 preset scale ...................................... 209210 Program Change events .......................... 155 Punch-in/out Recording ................... 138140

Q quantizing ................................... 96, 169170 Quick Recording .............................. 132135

R Recall ....................................................... 207 Recall Section ............................................ 99 recalling, registration ........................ 109110 Receive Filter ................................... 203204 Record Edit functions ....................... 166173 recording, Accompaniment Assistance 8186 recording, Chord Sequence ............. 141145 recording, Custom Style ....................... 9198 recording, Song ................................ 130140 recording, without a disk .......................... 174 recording, Step Edit ......................... 146165 Registration ...................................... 108112 Registration file ................................ 192195 Registration Freeze .......................... 110111 Remote Keyboard .................................... 205 Repeat ............................................. 122123 Reverb ................................................. 4650 reverb, Custom Style ....................... 100101 reverb, Song .................................... 120121 Reverb Type List ...................................... 218 reverb, vocals ................................... 177, 183 rewind ...................................................... 124 Rhythm On/Off ................................... 85, 145 right LCD buttons ....................................... 18 Right Pedal .............................................. 191

S saving, Custom Style ....................... 101102 saving, data files ...................................... 194 saving, Initial Edit ..................................... 171 saving, Step Edit ...................................... 165 saving, Vocal Harmony ............................ 184 Scale Tuning .................................... 209211 second voice .................................. 3840, 44 section ............................................ 9294, 99 Send Channel .................................. 201, 205

Setup files ........................................ 192195 Setup Memory .......................................... 172 setup procedure ......................................... 10 soft pedal ........................................... 45, 190 software ................................................... 124 song, Chord Sequence .................... 141145 song, Step Edit ................................. 146165 Song Copy ....................................... 196197 Song Data Transform ............................... 199 Song Delete ............................................. 198 Song Name ...................................... 166167 Song Play ......................................... 113124 Song Record .................................... 130140 Song Transmission .................................. 205 sostenuto pedal .......................................... 45 Sound Repeat .......................... 126, 127, 129 Split ...................................................... 4144 Split Point ................................. 41, 4344, 74 Step Edit .......................................... 146165 stereo position ................................. see pan storing, Custom Style ................................. 98 storing, Registration ......................... 108109 Style Clear ................................................. 99 style file ............................................ 105107 styles, custom .................................... 91107 styles, playback .................................... 6368 styles, selecting .................................... 6162 Synchronization (MIDI) ............................ 202 Synchronized Start ..................................... 65 Synchronized Stop ..................................... 74 System Exclusive events ......................... 157

T Tap Start .................................................... 65 tempo ................................... 27, 84, 116, 120 Tempo events .......................................... 151 terminals and jacks .............................. 1213 timbre ......................................................... 25 time signature ...................................... 28, 93 Time Signature events ............................. 152 Track Delete ..................................... 168169 Track Edit ......................................... 167170 Track Mix ......................................... 167168 Track Recording ............................... 135138 Track Quantize ................................. 169170 tracks, adding ........................................... 138 tracks, song structure ............................... 130 Transform ................................................. 199 Transpose ........................................ 188, 204 troubleshooting ................................ 229230 Tune ................................................. 188, 211

U user scale ......................................... 210211

V velocity ..................................................... 189 video monitor ........................................... 215 Video Out ................................................. 212 Vocal Harmony ................................ 175183 Vocal Harmony data ........................ 184185 Vocal Harmony Memory .......................... 173 voice, Organ Flutes .............................. 3335 Voice Setting ............................................ 189 voices, selecting ..................... 3132, 95, 119 volume ................................................. 2324 volume, metromome .................................. 28 volume, part ................... 7778, 84, 100101 volume, song ............................................ 119 volume, track .................................... 120121 volume, voices ............................... 37, 39, 42

Index

2 3

0

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con- tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instruc- tions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC

regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of inter- ference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the an- tenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Divi- sion, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor- dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi- nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.

(2 wires)

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR VITER LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.

This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Ceci ne sapplique quaux produits distribus par Yamaha Canada Musique Lte.

(polarity)

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod- uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre- cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, in- cluding connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup- plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any- one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri- cian.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca- tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc- tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly con- tribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this prod- uct close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca- tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam- ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex- tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de- scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli- fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces- sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de- signed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2

2 3

1

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de dtails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefhrten Nie- derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslndern erhltlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha ms cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouas 2636, So Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-371-7021

EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valle Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000

AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-81-5868

ASIA HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317

OCEANIA AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. 17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205, Australia Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273[CL] 19

ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain Tel: 91-577-7270

GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Gteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Nringspark 1 N-1345 sters, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

PANAMA

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Clavinova Yamaha works, you can view and download the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Yamaha Clavinova as well as other Yamaha manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Yamaha Clavinova. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-700 Piano Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.